HyundaiWia - SKT21LMS INSTALL MAINT MANUAL

SKT15LMS/21LMS CNC fflGH SPEED LATHE
INSTALLATION MANUAL
MAINTENANCE
(FANUC Oi-TB)
VERSION No. : VOL 1.0
HYurmni-Kin mncHinE
PREFACE
This manual provides step by step informations for the operation and
standard of SKT 15LMS & SKT 21LMS.
Always observe this manual to ensure proper operation and to

lengthen the lifetime of Machine Tool.
We hope this manual could help users and people concerned with
A/S. If you find any mistakes or anything in question, please let us to
know.
August, 2003
HYurmni-Kin mncmnE
The contents of this manual can be modified without any notice for improving the
performance and in accordance with a design change.
PRINTED IN HYUNDAI-KIA MACHINE

Contents Sfi IX
I . INTRODUCTION
l . SAFETY
I. SPECIFICATION
W. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
V. REPAIR & PRESERVATION
APPENDIX
HYunoHi-Kin mncHinE
INTRODUCTION
I . INTRODUCTION [
1 . Outline of The MANUAL I -5
1-1 . Symbol and Description I -6
2. Characteristics I -7
3. Standard Accessory I -7
4. Special Accessory I -8
Billi wsmmm u HII S mm mmmmwm

I . INTRODUCTION HYunnni-Kin mncmriE
1. Outline of the MANUAL
This manual contains the followings for a proper use and overall understanding of this
machine.
(1) NC device Operation Manual

Contains operating instructions.
(2) Installation & Maintenance Manual

Contains the periodic inspection aan the installation and maintenance instructions.
(3) Parameter List

Contains detailed parameters.
(4) Parameter List

Contains detailed parameters.
(5) Alarm List

Contains detailed alarm informations.
(6) Part List

Contains the details required to purchase the part.
(7) Electric Circuit Diagram

Contains electric circuit diagram.
The record of values including the “parameter table” enclosed here should be kept as it is
necessary for maintenance and adjustment of machine.
Thank you
I -5 -
HYunnHi-KiH mncHinE I . INTRODUCTION
1-1 Symbol and Description
(1) This manual contains 7 chapters shown in the Roman numerals.

Ex) I INTRODUCTION
I Title
Chapter 1
(2) Each chapter contains several sections.

Ex) 1 Outline of MANUAL
T I Title
Section 1
(3) A section contains several items

Ex) 1-1 Symbol and Description
I I Title
Item
Section 1
(4) Each item contains several paragraph

Ex) 4-1-1 Installation Condition
T I Title
Paragraph
Item
Section 4
(5) The figure and Table are shown in accordance with each “Chapter”
Ex) Figure 3-7 Major Dimensions of Head Stock
I Title
The seventh figure of Chapter 3.
Chapter 3
Ex) Table 3-1 Specification

Title
The 1st table of Chapter 3.
Chapter 3
I -6 -
I . INTRODUCTION HYunoHi-KiH mncmriE
2. Characteristics
This machine is four-axis control(C- and B-axis) CNC lathe with drum type turret tool
post, and has the following features.
(1) Enables chuck works.

(2) Uses AC conversion motor to directly change the speed in a wide range[7.5/llkW
(10HP/15HP) ( SKT 15L), ll/15kW(15HP/20HP)(SKT 21L)].
(3) Adopts the constant surface speed function as a standard option.
(4) Adopts the permanent set as a standard option, machines a variety of workpieces in
the same setting and uses the tools available in the market.
(5) Epoch-making reduction of the tool indexing time and the turret rotation speed by
applying the servo motor -driven tool post.
(6) Accurate positioning by using the advanced LM-guide and ball screw.
(7) The greatest feed rate(36m/min) of axis in the world.
(8) Minimized heat displacement in X-axis by double pre-tension structure.
(9) Stable bed structure of 45°.
(10) Ensures rapid and easier operating by applying the FANUC Oi-TA CNC of 32 bit.
(11) High quality one with a beautiful color and the cover designed somatologically.
(12) Adding special accessories enables to maximize the request for automatization and
higher productivity.
3. Standard Accessory
• j* 165(6.5") hollow chuck & rotary Door lock system (Only CE)
cylinder (SKT 15L) Automatic tail stock (Only LM)
• i> 210(8.3 " ) hollow chuck & rotary Levelling seat
cylinder (SKT 21L) Spanner & wrench
• Soft jaw Spindle override(50~150%)
• Hydraulic unit Foot switch (For chuck)
• Auto-coolant device Tail stock For./Ret. M function
• Auto-lubricating device Test report
• Base holder for Inside (Internal Diameter) tool Operation manual
• Sectional base holder Installation & maintenance manual
• Work Light Chuck close/open M function
• Call Light (1 Color) Spindle Load Meter
• Spindle RPM Meter
1-7 -
HYunnm-KiH mncmriE I . INTRODUCTION
4. Special Accessory
• Chip conveyor • Auto door
• Chip box • Spindle internal stopper
• Air blow • Work counter (for LM)
• Coolant gun • Integrating timer
• Jet coolant • Auto power cut off system
• Spindle internal coolant • Weekly timer
• Chuck upper coolant • Workpiece attachment
• TR robot confirmation device
• KN robot • Spare tool call function
• Tail stock For./Ret. foot switch - Rotary tool post
• Chuck pressure 2nd stage converting device • Sub spindle
• Spindle positioning device * QCT tool post
• Built-in tail stock • Call light (2, or 3 colors)
• Automatic tail stock • Chuck open/close confirmation device
• Sub- Spindle 5° positioning device
I -8 -
HYunDRi-KiR mncHinE
Illy SAFETY
I . SAFETY
1 . General 1-5 1
2. General Safety Precautions 1-6
3. Notice When Operating the Machine I -10
4. Notice When Repairing and Checking I -14
5. Notice on the Electric And NC Devices 1-17 I
6. Safety Device 1-19
6-1 . Name Plates I -19
6-2. Safety Device I -20 i

6-2-1 . Door Lock System (Applicable only to the C.E.) I -20
6-2-2. Pressure Switch(Applicable only to the C.E.) ... 1-21

H. SAFETY HYunoHi-KiR mncHinE
1. General
(1) The purpose of a safety notice is to avoid personal injury or damage to the equipment
from accidental events.
(2) The expressions DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION used in this manual, have a
special meaning, which is stated below:
A DANGER Failure to comply may result in personal death.
Failure to comply may result in personal severe injury or

A WARNING lethal damage to the machine.
Failure to comply may result in personal light injury or

A CAUTION damage to the machine.
(3) Read and observe instructions of the name plate on the machine. Also, do not change
the position of the name plate or damage it. If broken, purchase it with the no. of
item shown in Part List.
(4) Before servicing this machine, throughly be familiar with this instruction and the notice
of nameplate.
We’re not responsible for damage due to your careless use.
I -5 -
HYunoni-KiH mncmriE n. SAFETY
2. General Safety Precautions
A WARNING
(1) Do not touch any device in the Electric Control Panel and Operating Panel and in
which the mark is located.
(2) Prior to operating the machine, always close the door and check if safety shield
located. If the door opened, immediately turn off the main power.
H SB
=5!
I ! Y/T
I u-™3'
0J°°Fih :
Da a?
A WARNING
(1) Remember where the Emergency Stop
switch is to operate it anywhere at all
times.
(2) Before operating the machine, check if
the switches are functioned correctly
to avoid malfunction.
(3) Never touch any rotating part or tool
by hands while operating.
(4) Remove oil and water left on the floor
Figure 2-1. EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH
to prevent workers from slipping.
(5) Do not enter the inside of machine except for repairing work.
l -6 -
H. SAFETY HYunnni-Kin mncHinE
(6) When temporarily stopping a work and leaving the machine, first switch off the
Operating Panel and then the main power.
ON
I
POWER
OFF
Is lilt’
o © gl
T
©
p l(
(
,1
!
© A
(7) When finishing a daily work and leaving the machine, switch off the Operating Panel,
the main power switch, and then the power supply switch at factory.
POWER
ON
I ©
© 'Off
nit \oi
lit cv
.ft
k(
h © A
(8) It is dangerous to operate the machine when being operated or repaired by the other
worker. Be careful when more than two people have to work together.
FBI
>70
J
E
la V
1-7 -
HYunnm-Kin mncmriE H. SAFETY
(9) There are potentially dangerous situations inside of the machine such as rotating
workpiece, feeding tool post, dispersing coolant and hot chip. Always close the door of
machine while operating.
CD
rjioB
_
CZZ> j~ 1
CD CD
(MB ILLa
(10) Install the machine in a sufficiently bright, dry and arranged place free from any
obstacles.
(11) Do not place device workpiece and other items either on the machine moving part or
the machine frame.
(12) Do not reconstruct the machine without our prior permission.
4 CAUTION
(1) Check the machine regularly according to this manual.
(2) Always close the door during the automatic operation.
(3) Immediately turn off the main power during a service interruption.
o © Z/0-
©
© A
I -8 -
n. SAFETY HYUnDHI-KIR mRCHIIIE
(4) Do not change the position of nameplate attached to the machine. If damaged,
purchase it with the Item No. of Part List or one in the lower right of nameplate.
OL
(
JloS
I — _~T “7 I
(5) Always wear protective glasses during working.
(6) Always wear safety shoes.
(7) Wear the safety cap and do not wear your uniforms loosely.
(8) Never operate the machine while wearing gloves.
mm
r)off
o
cZB
(9) Keep the workbench near the machine enough to be strong and not to be slippery.
(10) Do not operate the machine while drinking or taking a medicine.
(11) Do not operate the machine when feeling a sick or sleepy.
I -9 -
HYunoni-Kin mnciHinE H. SAFETY
3. Notice When Operating the Machine.

Before operating the machine, make sure the followings.
A WARNING
(1) Always close the door of the Electric Control Panel to avoid damage due to water,
chip, or oil.
m SB
X
CD O
Ulr a?
(2) It is dangerous to remove the chip attached or dropped to the tool with bare hands.
Therfore, stop the machine and wear gloves and then do a job using brush.
(([
luFnf
(3) Do not adjust the location of coolant nozzle while operating.
(4) Gradually increase the rpm of spindle to allow sufficient warming-up. Otherwise, it
may result in damage of the chuck cylinder (Refer to Repair and Preservation, step 2-
9/5 par. “A. warm up of spindle” (page V-53)).
I -10 -
H. SAFETY HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE
(5) Do not pull out or modify the
instruments or electric circuits installed
for a safety such as the stroke limit dog
of feed system, the limit switch, the
interlock limit switch, and etc.
(6) Check the belt for tension. Make it sure

S
that your hands or fingers are not hold V)
between the belt and the pulley.
(7) Always clamp the workpiece or the tool exactly. For the cutting depth and feedrate,
begin from the minimum level.
//
ofi'
%
\ n
(8) When the machine rotated at a high speed, the clamping force of chuck will be
decreased rapidly. Be careful to set up the pressure of chuck and cylinder.
(9) When chucking and centering the center workpiece, take care of its weight, the hole
of center, configuration, and thrust of center. If centering and loading through a small
hole, the lead-edge of center may be broken and the workpiece sprung out.
=:
I -11 -
HYurmni-Kin mncHinE D. SAFETY
(10) When self Boring of the soft jaw, pay attention to the location of self Boring Ring and
configuration of self Boring. After cutting the jaw, clamping the jaw correctly and
check the pressure of chuck is proper.
(11) If rotating the spindle when the center is not placed on the center of rotation and
being eccentric, it may cause the machine itself vibration and affect its working
accuracy. Keep its balance by attaching the balance.
4 CAUTION
(1) Do not touch kinds of switch with wet hands.
(2) While heavy cutting, a fire can happen due to a hot chip. Make it sure the chip not
to be accumulated.
(3) Check each bolt is clamped properly.
(4) Check there is a strange sound from the motor or anywhere else on working.
o o'
nOK l
CD
I -12 -
n. SAFETY HYunnni-Kin mncHinE
(5) Warm up the spindle and feed system prior to operating.
(6) When installing the tool, stop the feeding axis and the spindle.
(7) When installing the tool, pay special attention to the edge of tools. Install it not to be
protruded over the specified length.
Oi
1
[0/ I
(8) After installing the tool, first perform a test operation.
(9) When installing the workpiece on the standard chuck, make the outer circumference of
jaw positioned in the external diameter of chuck.
(10) Visually check the switch on the Operating Panel and then operate it correctly.
ovo
0
'OoRy' cm i
Oj l V
wy
0
1
(11) Check the pressure gage indicates correctly.
v® a CZD
(
\
CD
OiLlZlJÿ
(12) For the machine with special accessory, follow the specified instructions.
1-13 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE D. SAFETY
4. Notice When Repairing And Checking

After reading this manual thoroughly, perform the maintenance.
A DANGER
(1) Before repairing the machine, always ensure the main power is off.
(2) For a while even after the power off, always check there is residual current in the
Electric Control Panel and the Electric device and then perform the maintenance.
© [/
i
%
id
Q
©
m x"'
CD
\
:
OLMI
@ 0
0
J0 0
(3) Open the door of the Electric Control Panel only for repairing.
m
rn d
CD
1-14 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE SAFETY
(2) The instruments specified by our company should be used in the Electric Control
Panel. Especially use the specified fuse and never use that of great capacity or a
copper wire.
(3) When repairing the electric instrument, switch OFF the power of the Opreating Panel.
Also switch OFF the Electric Control Panel and then the Power Supply at factory.
POWER
ON OFF
© ©
lilt ©
nut
j.
h ©
(4) Do not change a current setting of the overload relay in the Electric Control Panel and
any settings of various volumes.
A
A CAUTION
(1) Do not open the door of the Electric Control Panel or the Operating Panel, if possible.
The penetration of foreign material or humidity may result in misoperation.
X
m
PIT
s a?
(2) Special care should be taken in handling the electric instrument of the body.
(3) Clean the fan and filter in the Electric Control Panel regularly.
(4) Check the no. of program on the screen of the Operating Panel.
I -18 -
n. SAFETY HYUnDRI-KIH (HHCHiriE
6. Safety Device
6-1. Name plates
° ADANGER A WARNING0
C € lÿinQ
J' oJ Do not place
hands of fingers
0
ADANGER
d * between
subchuck during
operation.
Failure to comply
may result in
personnel servere
Failure to comply may
result in personal
injury.
servere injury or death. 1676-05-308-0
High voltage is used in
this machine.
Only qualified personnel
should attempt
installation or repair.
m
Do not touch electric
accessories immediately
°A WARNING0
after turning off the
power.
Do not remove this sign this place.
Keep hands or head

away from the
NOTICE rotating Tool Post.
We are not responsible for Otherwise, it may
unauthorized modifications.
g _ Do not remove this sign this dace.
3000-48-346-1ÿ
result in personnel
severe injury.
1676-05-307-0
AWARNING
<®
A NOTICE
•Use the attached outlet for
the measuring instrument
or input/ output device, /c
100V. max 2Amp
•Do not connect other
device like the electric-
l.When inserting a bar O powered tool to prevent the
to the rear of spindle, malfunction of machin.
use proper bar feeder. O Do not renove this sign from this fiace.
2.Keep away from the
bar while the spindle
being rotated.
3.When using the bar
with small diameter
use the spindle guide.
Otherwise, it may A NOTICE
result in personnel 1. Do not extend jaws outside of*
severe injury. chuck diameter.
1676-05-305-0 oJ 2. Rotary tool tip must not
extend beyond the specified
amount from the turret.
3. Take care not to allow the
LD. tool to collide with the
cover when protruded
mere than 135mm(5.3in)
A
° AWARNING0 from the turret head
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS toward the spindle.
4. When operating, check
1. Only well-educated and qualified personnel interference between rotary tools
can operate this machine. and chuck/work by refering
2. After thoroughly reading this manual and instruction manual
name plates, service this machine. 5. Insure tooling dears
3. Prior to operation, install the safety shield chuck/work before indexing
to the desired place. turret.
4. Do not operate the machine with wearing 6. When using Q-setter, check tod
ring, watch, or loose clothes. While length by reefing instruction manual.
Make sure close operating, keep away from the moving part. 7. Do not operate machine if
the door prior to 5. Always wear safety goggles and shoes. turret face is out of position,
6. Before servicing the machine, close the door. power interruptions and
operation. mechanical interference can
Otherwise, it may 7. When cleaning and checking the machine, cause mislocatkn See
turn off the power.
cause personnel 8. Only qualified expert can install and repair instruction manual to correct.
severe injury. the machine. 8. Operate machine after read instruction
manual, when using c-axis, sub -spindle.
Do not remove this sign from this place.
Do not remove this sign from this place.
1676-05-302-0 Q 1676-05-303-0 1676-05-304-0 J
1-19 -
HYunoRi-KiH mncHinE H. SAFETY
6-2. Safety Device
1
>7S
r
05
g 2
No. Name Function
1 Door Lock System If the door opened while operating the

machine, it may be in Emergency
Stop state.
2 Emergency Stop Switch If pressing this switch, all operating

parts except hydraulic ones will be
stopped.
6-2-1. Door Lock System (Applicable only to the C.E.)
A WARNING
Set the “LOCK/UNLOCK” switch of door lock system to “LOCK”.
If setting it to “UNLOCK”, it may allow the door to be opened while operating
and cause serious risks.
1-20 -
n. SAFETY HYUnDHI-KIH mHCHiriE
sy
<y
y
If a power failure occurred while operating, turn the lock switch to “UNLOCK” to open
the door.
4 WARNING
We are not responsible for the accident due to unauthorized modifications of Door
Lock System.
6-2-2. Pressure Switch (Applicable only to the C.E.)

1) Function and Description
- This switch is installed to show the minimum oil pressure involved in the chuck
for safe catching.
- The permissible maximum oil pressure of chuck is 27 kgf/cd (2.7Mpa).
Adjusting Bolt
i
>
)
Pressure
Switch
1-21 -
HYunoHi-Kin mflCHinE D. SAFETY
2) Setting Method
- With observing the pressure gage, turn the adjusting Bolt in the manifold and set the
desired pressure of chuck.
- Turn the pressure adjusting Bolt and set the pressure switch to the desired value.
- The Setting value appears on the display.
- Keep the pressure of pressure switch with 80% of chuck.

- For example, when the pressure of chuck is 25 kgf/cni ( 2.5 Mpa), the recommended
setting pressure is about 20kgf/cri(2 MPa).
I -22 -
HYunom-Kin mncmriE
SPECIFICATION
I I . SPECIFICATION
1 . Introduction 1-5
1-1. Head Stock 1-5
1-2. Tool Post 1-5
1-3. Tail Stock 1-5
1-4. Live Tool 1-5
1-5. Composition and Placement of Tool 1-5
1-6. C-axis 1-5
1-7. Sub Spindle 5° Partition Device 1-6 *
1-8. Sub Spindle & B-axis 1-6

1-9. Precaution 1-6
2. Specification 1-7
2-1. Spindle Output and Torque Diagram 1-8
3. NC Device Specification 1-9

3-1. G Function I -11
3-2. M Function (Auxiliary) 1-13
4. Machine Part and Name 1-20
5. Machine Outline Diagram 1-21
7:15
6. Head Stock 1-22
6-1. SUPER KIATURN 15L 1-22
6-2. SUPER KIATURN 21 L 1-23
6-3. Major Dimensions of Head Stock 1-24
6-4. Major Dimensions of Sub Spindle 1-25
7. Chuck and Rotary Cylinder 1-26

7-1 . Hollow Chuck Major Dimensions 1-26
7-2. Sub Spindle Hollow Chuck Major Dimensions 1-27
7-3. SUPER KIATURN 15L Hollow Chuck(6", *165) 1-28
7-3-1 . Connecting Parts for Rotary Cylinder 1-28
7-3-2. Major Dimensions 1-29
7-4. SUPER KIATURN 21 L Hollow Chuck(8V
* 210) I -29
7-4-1 . Connecting Parts for Rotary Cylinder 1-29
7-4-2. Major Dimensions 1-30
7-5. Major Dimensions of Connecting Parts for Sub Chuck Cylinder I -31
8. Tool Post 1-32

8-1. Turret I -32
8-2. SUPER KIATURN 15L 1-33
8-3. SUPER KIATURN 21 L 1-35
m. SPECIFICATION HYunoHi-KiH mncHiriE
1. Introduction
1-1. Head Stock

Ensures the wide-range change in speed by the AC spindle motor as follows : For
SUPER KIATURN 15, between 30 and 5,000 rpm and for SUPER KIATURN 21,
between 20 and 4,000 rpm.
Besides, it enables the constant spindle speed control by the AC spindle motor.
1-2. Tool Post

Ensures more rapid and accurate indexing work(0.2 sec/surface) by the servo motor
and the 3-piece coupling.
1-3. Tail Stock

Install the taper of MT No. 4 sold as a commercial live center.
The tail stock is set to random position by controlling the key above the support. Also,
the thrust can be adjusted between 50 and 450kgf(500N and 4500N) according to the
hydraulic adjustment.
1-4. Live Tool

The AC Servo Motor is attached behind the tool post and the power is passed to the
mill spindle with the STS Belt and Gear connected. For interference between the body
of Tool Post and Tail Stock or Sub Spindle, see the interference diagram.
1-5. Composition and Placement of Tool

Tool Post can be attached with the Turning Tool and Rotating Tool temporarily as the
temporary 12-angle variable arrangement using the tooling system in the method of
VDI Clamp. Rotating Tool can be machined with the collets for Tap or Drill End Mill
attached to the X-and Z-axes rotating tool.
1-6. C-axis
C-axis machine can partition ( 0.001° ) the spindle and control it as NC using the
hydraulic brake and BZ Sensor, so the Mill works such as Cam machining, key
grooving, square, drill and tap, etc. is enabled with rotating tool.
1-5 -
HYUflDHI-KIH mHCHIflE in. SPECIFICATION
1-7. Sub Spindle 5° Partition Device

Enables the Sub Spindle in the unit of 5° using the Pin Locking System and the End
mill, Drill and tap works are enabled with the rotating tool.
1-8. Sub Spindle & B-axis

Sub Spindle is positioned against the main spindle and machines the Back Surface using
the holder for Back Surface Machining attached to the tool post with the workpiece
seized to the sub spindle, machining and then synchronizing the workpiece at the Main
Spindle. The spindle motor enables wide transmission automatically by means of the AC
Servo Motor. Also, the movement of sub spindle is instructed to the NC Control Axis.
1-9. Precaution
4 WARNING
1. The absolute and relative value addresses of B-axis are the same. Paying
attention is required when programming.
=> Perform the programming using the distance from the reference point of
B-axis.
2. When the second reference point is commanded (G30 BO;) not at the
reference point of B-axis, spindle moves to the second reference point after
moving to “BO” (machine reference point)
=> Process above is caused by the fact that the absolute and relative value
addresses of B-axis are the same.
3. Only in the JOG mode, spindle moves at the reference point return
speed (not at the feedrate) when touching the Z-axis reference point dog
nearby second reference point of B-axis while moving (machining) at he
feedrate during machining the workpiece. Pay proper attention.
=> Above item is not applied in the program operation.
4. When using two spindles, discrimination between the first and the second
spindles is performed using M code (not S code(RPM command)). So the
previous spindle RPM can be influenced when rotating one spindle after
rotating the other spindle. Pay proper attention.
5. When using the G96( Spindle constant speed control) and the fixed cycle
function(G96, G92, G94) at the same time, please read and understand the
FANUC manual prior to programming.
1-6 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunDHi-Kin mncHinE
2. Specification
Table. 3-1 Specification
Swing over bed 550(21.6)

Max, machining dia. 0255(10) 0350(13.8) 255(10)
0210(8) 0210(8) 0210(8)
Main 0165(6) 0165(6) 0165(6)
Chuck size 10254(10)1 10 254(10)1 10254(10)1
Sub 0 135(13.8)
Swing over crosss slide mm(in) 0 350(13.8)
Max. turning length 530(20.8)
038(1.5) 051(2) 038(1.5) 051(2) 038(1.5) 051(2)
Bar capacity |0 65(2.6)| |043(1.7)|
10 43(1,7)1 1 0 65(2.6)| |0 43(1.7)| 1065(2,6)1
5,000 5,000 5,000
Main | 6,000 4,000 4,000 4,000
Speed rpm i 6,000 6,000
Sub 5,000
0 100(3.9) 0 100(3.9) 0100(3.9)
Out Dia. Main mm(in) 0 80(3.1) 10110(4,3)1 080(3.1) 10110(4,3)1 080(3.1) 10110(4.3)1
(BRG. ID.)
Sub 0 60(2.4)
A2-6 A2-6 A2-6
Main ASA A2-5 A2-5 A2-5
Nose 1 A2-8 1 I A2-8 I I A2-8 |
Sub FLAT 0115
No. of Tools st 12
25/ 0 32 25/ 0 40 25/ 0 32 25/ 0 40 25/ 0 32 25/ 0 40
Tools dimension mm(in) (D/(iT) (i)/(ii) +
(1)/(1 ) (D/UT) (!)/(! ) + (l)/(li)
Indexing time
(1 step/full) sec 0.3/0.6 0.2/0.4 0.3/0.6
Mechanism SERVO
Rotating Speed rpm 4,000 4,000
0 20[M16] 0 20[M16]
Drill/Tap size mm (in) (3/4[5/8] ) (3/ 4[5/8] )
X 36(1,417)
Z m/min 36(1,417)
Rapid travel (ipm)
B 30(1,181)
C min'1 100 100
X 200(8.7) 210(8.2) 220(8.7)
Z mm (in) 550(21.6)
Travels B 750(29.5)
C deg 360° 360°
Spindle Taper MT4
Travels mm (in) 500(19,7)
Thrust kgf(lbs) 450(990)
fcJT-.-: Travel Type Auto position
11/7.5 15/11 11/7.5 15/11 11/7.5 15/11
Spindle Main (15/10) (20/15) (15/10) (20/15) (15/10) (20/15)
Sub kW 3.7/2.2(5/3)
X (HP) 3.0(4)
Feed Z 3.0(4)
B 1.6 (2,1)
KVA 25 30 25 30 30 30
kg (lbs) 4,300(9,500)
FANUC Oi-TB
I I : Big Bore type
I -7 -
HYunnfli-KiH mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION
2-1. Spindle Output and Torque Diagram

• The constant output area and torque to ensure the rated output of machine are shown
in the followings.
• SUPER KIATURN 15L
5,000 (rpm) TORQUE 6,000 (rpm) TORQUE

OUTPUT (kgfm) OUTPUT (kglm)
POWER (Nm) POWER (Nm)
(kW) (kW) _n
ej
(Hp) 15 (Hp) 15
10 10 10 10
13.3 98 13.3 98
9.6 9.6
12.8
8.57 12.8 7.14
rt 83.99 rt 69.97
JL 5 _L 5
6.7 49 6.7 49
X.
••• 2.14
*•.
1.78
20.97 17.44
1,250 3,000 4,375 5,000 (rpm) 1,500 3,000 5,250 6,000 (rpm)
Fig. 3-1 Output and Torque Diagram
• SUPER KIATURN 21L
4,000 (rpm) TORQUE

(kgfm)
5,000 (rpm) TORQUE
(kglm)
OUTPUT OUTPUT
(Nm) (Nm)
POWER POWER
(kW) 29.22 (kW)
20 20 _
286.36
23.38
229.21
196 J5
15 20
10
10
10
98 13.3 \ 98
\
•• :*
5 5
5
49
JL
6.7 49
3.65 2.92
35.77 28.62
250 500 1,000 3,000 4,000 (rpm) 300 625 1,000 3,000 5,000
Fig. 3-2 Output and Torque Diagram
1-8 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunoHi-Kin mncHinE
3. NC Device Specification (FANUC Oi-TB)
Specification
Controlling Axis X, Z, C, B-axis (C, B-axis OPTION)

Interpolation Function Positioning, Linear, Circular, Polar Coordinate, Cylindrical
Designation System Absolute/Incremental Programming
Least Input Increment 0.001mm, O.OOldeg, O.OOOlinch)
Tape Code EIA/ISO Automatic Recognition
Spindle Speed Function S5-digit, Binary output
Feed Command F code fedrate direct command.
Feedrate Override 0-200% (20 Step)
Jog Override 0—2000 mm/min (20 Step)
Rapid Traverse Override F0, F5, F25, F100%
Manual Handle Feedrate xl, xlO, xlOO
Inch/Metric Conversion G20, G21
Tool Offset Pairs No. of offset : 64
Display Unit 8.4" Color LCD
Part Program Storage Length 640m
Number of Registerable Programs 400EA
Workpiece Coordinate System G52-G59
Coordinate System Shift Standard
Chamfering/Corner R Standard
Custom Macro B Review SPEC, when using DI/DO
Programmable Data Input G10
Canned Cycles G90, G92, G94
Multiple Repetitive Cycle G70, G71, G72, G73, G74, G75, G76
Canned Cycles for Drilling G80, G83, G84, G85, G87, G88, G89
Direct Input of Tool Offset Standard
Value Measured B
Tool Life Management Standard
Tool Nose Radius Compensation G40, G41, G42
Tool Geometry /Wear Compensation Standard
Constant Surface Speed Control
—
G96 SXXXX
Spindle Override 50% 150% (lOStep)
Direct Drawing Dimension Programming
1-9 -
HYurmni-KiR mRCHinE m. SPECIFICATION
Reader/Puncher Interface RS232C *1

Optional Block Skip 1EA
Program Check Dry Run + Spindle Stop + Coolant Stop
Threading, Synchronous Cutting G32
Variable Lead Threading G34
Reference Position Return Manual, Automatic G27, G28, G30
Stored Stroke Check Stored Stroke Check 1, 2, 3 (G22, G23)
Display of Spindle Speed and
T code at all screens
Spindle Orientation 1 Position
Rigid Tapping Only “M\ “MS"
Memory Lock Key
Machine Lock
Single Block
Dry Run
Run Hour and Parts Count Display
Program Number Search
/Sequence Number Search
Self-Diagnosis Function
Dwell G04
Background Editing
Erase CRT screen Display

Stored Pitch Error Compensation
Program Restart
Actual Cutting Feedrate Display
* 1. Only Interface exists. The cable connected with I/O device is not included.
OPTION
Optional Block Skip 9EA (Review machine spec.)

Handle Interrupt Review machine spec.
Tool Number Display Review machine spec. (7-segment)
Playback Review machine spec.
Graphic Function Graphic Module
Spindle Index (Multi) Review machine spec
I -10 -
ffl. SPECIFICATION HYunoHi-KiH mncHinE
3-1. G Function
Standard
G Code
Group Function
GOO Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
01
G02 Circuit interpolation CW
G03 Circuit interpolation CCW
G04 Dwell
G05 High-speed remote buffer
G7.1 00 Cylindrical interpolation
G10 Programmable data input
Gil Programmable data input cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 Input in inch
06
G21 Input in mm
G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Reference position return
G30 00 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G30.1 Floating reference position return
G31 Skip function
G32 Thread cutting
01
G34 Variable-lead thread cutting
G36 Automatic tool compensation X
G37 00 Automatic tool compensation Z
G39 Corner Circular
G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 Tool nose radius compensation right
G50 Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
00
G50.3 Workpiece coordinate system preset
I -11 -
HYunoHi-KiH mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION
Standard
G Code
Group Function
G50.2 Polygonal turning cancel

20
G51.2 Polygonal turning
G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
14
G65 06 Macro calling
G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 Macro modal call cancel
G68 Mirror image for double turrets ON
04
G69 Mirror image for double turrets OFF
G70 Finishing cycle
G71 Stock removal in turning
G 72 Stock removal in facing
G73 00 Pattern repeating
G74 End face peck drilling
G75 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 Multiple threading cycle
G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G83 Cycle for face drilling
G84 Cycle for face tapping
G86 10 Cycle for face boring
G87 Cycle for side drilling
G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 Cycle for side boring
G90 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 01 Thread cutting cycle
G94 End face turning cycle
G96 Constant spindle speed control
02
G97 Constant spindle speed control cancel
G98 Per minute feed
05
G99 Per revolution feed
* FANUC G-CODE A System.
1-12 -
IE. SPECIFICATION HYunDHi-KiR mncHinE
3-2. M Function (Auxiliary)
3-2-1. M Code List
M M
CODE FUNCTION REMARK CODE FUNCTION REMARK
00 PROGRAM STOP 40 C-AXIS NOT CONNECT OP
01 OPTIONAL STOP 41
02 PROGRAM END 42
03 SPINDLE FORWARD 43 C-AXIS CONNECT OP.
04 SPINDLE REVERSE 44
05 SPINDLE STOP 45
06 46
07 47
08 COOLANT ON 48
09 COOLANT OFF 49
10 50
11 51 SPINDLE AIR BLOW ON OP.
12 COUNTER OP. 52 SPINDLE AIR BLOW OFF OP.
13 MILL SP. FORWARD 53
14 MILL SP. REVERSE 54 MAIN SYNCHRO. SELECT(STD)
15 MILL SP. STOP 55 SUB SYNCHRO. SELECT
16 56
17 57
18 SP. ORIENTATION OFF OP. 58
19 SP. ORIENTATION ON OP. 59
20 60
21 ERROR DETECT ON 61 AUTO DOOR(SHUTTER) OPEN OP.
22 ERROR DETECT OFF 62 AUTO DOOR ( SHUTTER ) CLOSE OP.
23 CHAMFERING ON 63 PART CATCHER UP OP.
24 CHAMFERING OFF 64 PART CATCHER DOWN OP.
25 CENTER FORWARD(TIME) OP. 65
26 CENTER RETTACT (TIME) OP. 66 CHUCK PRESSURE LOW OP.
27 67 CHUCK PRESSURE HIGH OP.
28 CENTER RETTACT(END) OP. 68 CHUCK CLOSE
29 69 CHUCK OPEN
30 NC RESET & REWIND 70 CALL LIGHT ON
31 COUNT UP CHECK OP. 71
32 72
33 73 SUB PART CATCHER UP
34 74 SUB PART CATCHER DOWN
35 75 CHIP CONVEYOR START OP.
36 AUTO POWER OFF ENABLE OP. 76 CHIP CONVEYOR STOP OP.
37 AUTO POWER OFF DISABLE OP. 77
38 CENTER AIR BLOW ON OP. 78
39 1 CENTER AIR BLOW OFF OP. 79
1-13 -
HYurmni-KiR mncmnE HI. SPECIFICATION
M M
CODE FUNCTION REMARK CODE FUNCTION REMARK
80 120
81 ROBOT SERVICE REQUEST 1 OP. 121
82 ROBOT SERVICE REQUEST 2 OP. 122
83 123
84 124
85 125
86 126
87 127
88 128
89 129
90 C-AXIS BRAKE ON(fflGH) 140 EXTERNAL M CODE 1 ON OP.
91 C-AXIS BRAKE OFF(LOW) 141 EXTERNAL M CODE 1 OFF OP.
92 142 EXTERNAL M CODE 2 ON OP.
93 143 EXTERNAL M CODE 2 OFF OP.
98 SUB PROGRAM CALL 148
99 END OF SUB PROGRAM 149
100 150
101 151 SUB SP. AIR BLOW ON OP.
102 152 SUB SP. AIR BLOW OFF OP.
103 153
104 154
105 155
106 156
107 157
108 SUB SP. COOLANT ON 158
109 SUB SP. COOLANT OFF 159
110 SUB SP. SELECT (STD.) 160 SI, S2 SYNCHRO. ON
111 MILL SP. SELECT 161 SI, S2 SYNCHRO. OFF
112 162 SI, S2 PHASE SYNCHRO. ON
113 SUB SP. FORWARD 163
114 SUB SP. REVERSE 164
115 SUB SP. STOP 165
116 SUB SP. ORT ON 166
117 SUB SP. ORT OFF 167
118 SUB SP. CHUCK CLAMP 168
119 SUB SP. CHUCK UNCLAMP 169
1-14 -
IE. SPECIFICATION HYUnDHI-KIR mflCHinE
3-2-2. M Function (Auxiliary)
M code Function Details

MOO Program stop If measuring the workpiece or removing the chip while operation,
it is possible to stop operating (also, spindle, and coolant). Restart
can be done by Start Button, but the operation of spindle of
spindle and coolant restarted by command M03 and M08.
M01 Optional stop The same function with MOO. Enables or overrides the command
of M01 in the program using the soft key of Operation Panel.
Soft Key “Optional Stop” Lamp ON (enable to stop)
Lamp OFF (disable to stop)
M02 Program end After a completion of machining in the tape operation, finish
reading the tape and stop spindle and coolant.
The NC device is reset.
M03 Spindle forward Spindle rotates anti-clockwise as seen at the sub spindle or center.
rotation
M04 Spindle reverse Spindle rotates clockwise as seen at the sub spindle or center.
rotation
M05 Spindle stop Stop rotating the spindle. If instructing the reverse from the
forward rotation (vice verse), temporarily stop it at M05 and then
instruct M04(M03).
M08 Coolant ON Discharge coolant.
M09 Coolant OFF Stop discharging coolant.
M12 Workpiece counter Starts and counts up the commercial workpiece counter or the
tool counter.
M13 Rotating tool Rotating tool rotates clockwise as seen at the front.
forward
M14 Rotating tool Rotating tool totates counter-clockwise as seen at the front.
reverse
M15 Rotating tool stop Stop rotating the milling spindle. If instructing the reverse from
the forward rotation (vice verse), temporarily stop it at M15 and
then instruct M14(M13).
M18 Spindle positioning Cancel the positioning of spindle.
release
M19 Spindle positioning Positioning the spindle.
M21 Error detect ON Error detect ON
M22 Error detect OFF Error detect OFF
1-15 -
HYunom-Kin mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION

M23 Chamfering ON Thread auto-chamfering during a thread cutting cycle (G92).
(thread Chamfering lengh is set to 0.1 l at the parament.
auto-chamfering )
EÿU
*-K
Chamfering ON in the command of M23
M24 Chamfering OFF Cancelling M23.
M25 Tail stock forward Forwards tail stock by M25 command while operating the progam.
Enables when the spindle stops.
M26 Tail stock retract Retracts tail stock when the spindle stops.
M28 Tail stock full Move tail stock to the end of retract.
stroke retract
M30 Program end Use in stead of M02 in case of memory operation. The same
(Memory mode) function of M02 but has the function to be returned to the head
of memory (single block command).
M31 Check the number 1. Checks the tool life
of no material 2. Checks the number of machining in the counter.
3. Checks no material when attaching the bar-feeder.
M36 Power cut off When the power cut off enable is ON, shut down the power by
enable when the MOO, M01, M02 and M30 commands.
program stops
M37 Power cut off When the power cut off disable is ON, don’ t shut down the
disable when power in spite of the MOO, M01, M02 and M30 commands.
program stops
M38 Center air blow Discharge AIR to the live center.
M39 Center air blow Stop feeding AIR.
OFF
M40 C axis unconnect Converts the C- axis (rotating) to spindle.
M43 C axis connect Converts the spindle to C- axis (rotating)
M51 Spindle air blow Feen AIR to chuck. (Rotating the 50rpm)
ON
M52 Spindle air blow Stop feeding AIR.
OFF
1-16 -
HI. SPECIFICATION HYunDHi-Kin mncHinE

M54 The 2nd spindle Constant speed control can be only done at the 1st or 2nd spindle.
control OFF (The 1st spindle control)
M55 The 2nd Spindle Constant speed control can be only done at the 1st or 2nd spindle.
control ON (The 2nd spindle control)
M61 Auto door open Openthe door by program command.
M62 Auto door closed Close the door.
M63 Unloader forward Part catcher up.
M64 Unloader retract Part catcher down.
M66 Chuck clamp Spindle and chuck pressures changed to low.
pressure low
M67 Chuck clamp changed to high.
pressure high
M68 Chuck clamp Close the spindle chuck.
M69 Chuck unclamp Spindle chuck opened.
M70 Call light ON Call light ON.
M73 Sub unloader Sub part catcher up.
forward
M74 Sub unloader Sub part catcher down.
retract
M76 Chip conveyor Stop chip conveyor.
stop
M81 Robot service 1 Robot start 1
M82 Robot service 2 Robot start 2
M90 Main spindle Clamp the position of spindle externally.
brake on
M91 Main spindle Unclamp the position of spindle externally.
brake off
M98 Sub program call Feed to sub program from main program.
M99 Main program Return main program from sub program, or move to the head
return during main program.
M108 Sub spindle Discharge coolant for the sub spindle.
coolant ON
M109 Sub spindle Stop discharge coolant for the sub spindle.
coolant OFF
M110 Sub spindle select Change over sub spindle in the spindle switch control
(Applied only to 1 AMP 2 SPINDLES type)
Mill Mil spindle select Change over mill spindle in the spindle switch control
(Applied only to 1 AMP 2 SPINDLES type)
M113 Sub spindle Sub spindle rotates anti-clockwise as seen at the main spindle.
forward (Same direction of spindle rotation)
1-17 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION

M114 Sub spindle Sub spindle rotates clockwise as seen at the main spindle.
reverse (Same direction of spindle rotation)
M115 Sub spindle stop Stop rotating the sub spindle. If instructing the reverse from the
forward rotation(vice verse), temporarily stop it at M115 and then
instruct M114(M113).
M116 Sub spindle Positining the sub spindle.
positioning
M117 Sub spindle Cancel the positioning of sub spindle.
positioning release
M118 Sub spindle Close the sub spindle chuck.
chuck clamp
M119 Sub spindle Open the sub spindle chuck.
chuck unclamp
M140 External M-code External M-code 1 signal ON.
1 ON
M141 External M-code External M-code 1 signal OFF.
1 OFF
2 ON
2 OFF
3 ON
3 OFF
4 ON
4 OFF
M151 Sub spindle air Feed AIR to sub spindle chuck (Rotating the 50rpm).
blow on
M152 Sub spindle air Stop feeding AIR for sub spindle chuck.
blow off
M160 Spindle synchro First and second spindle rpm synchroness.
ON
M161 Spindle synchro Cancel the first and second spindle rpm synchroness.
OFF
M162 Spindle phase First and second spindle phase synchroness.
synchro ON
M300 Spindle position M codes are defined with increment of 5°.
command
* M05 and M09 are operated after completion of other functions in the same block.
x Do not instructing the M code simultaneously in the same group.
1-18 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunDRi-Kin mncHinE
Sub Program Call
(Ex)
Main Program Sub Program

N001 --0101; 0401
N002 N102. N402
N003 N103 M98 P401 N403
N004 M98 P101
N005 c N104
-N105 M99; -N405 M99;
N006
N007 M98 P101 L2 -0201 ;
N008 _ N202 .
N009 -N203 .
N010 N204 M99;
N011
N012 M98 P301 0301
N013 _ N302
N014 N303 M99 P015
N015
N016 M98 P018
N017
N018
1-19 -
HYunDm-Kin mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION
4. Machine Part and Name
Electric Control
Panel
X-axis Motor
Saddle
X-axis
Turret
0°
Tool Post
Z-axis
A 38!
Head Stock
& 0 S'
r>;
Tail Stock
Z-axis Motor Bed
m
Rotary Cylinder
n 0
Spindle Motor '/ Coolant Tank
e
Lubrication Pump /
Hydraulic
Manifold
Hydraulic Motor
Fig. 3-3 Name of Each Part
1-20 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYUnDHI-KIH mHCHiriE
5. Machine Outline Diagram
mm(in)
o
OO
(SQCD
[OOOOOOj
02L?i2 o
>ÿ 2950
(116.1)
o S'
k
1650
(64.9)
*Note: The outline of SKT 15LMS and SKT 21LMS is the same in its size.
Fig. 3-4 Machine Outline Diagram
1-21 -
HYunDHi-Kin mncHinE ffl. SPECIFICATION
6. Head Stock
6-1. SUPER KIATURN 15L
•The name of each part is as follows.

A CAUTION
Before operating the machine, sufficiently warm up the Head Stock.
•The Head Stock is A2-5

8
4 0.
7
9
6
51
5
52)
fi 1
Fig. 3-5 Head Stock (SUPER KIATURN 15L)
No. Part Name No. Part Name
1 Spindle 7 Collar “B"

2 Head Body 8 Rear Flange
3 Bearing 9 Seal
4 Labyrinth 10 Hex. Bolt
5 Front Flange 11 Spindle Pulley
6 Collar “A” 12 Key
1-22 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYUnDHI-KIfl mHCHIflE
6-2. SUPER KIATURN 21L/21LB
•The Head Stock is A2-6(SKT 21LB is A2-8)
*o,
9 O.
W
2
4
7 41
5
3
3
4
Fig. 3-6 Head Stock (SUPER KIATURN 21L/21LB)
No. Part Name No. Part Name
1 Spindle 7 Key
2 Head Body 8 Collar
3 Bearing 9 Retainer
4 Labyrinth 10 Spindle Pulley
5 Cover 11 Plug
6 Piece 12 Nut
1-23 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION
6-3. Major Dimensions of Head Stock
L2.
11
2-Z5
'
a
Z6
£
a
to
O
in
O 5 5lo 3 3
II,
p
mkm.
s ITS
Z7_
t2 14 15 n-Z2 n'z4
n-Z3 n-ZI
L1
Fig. 3-7 Major Dimensions of Head Stock
mm(in)
No. SKT 15L SKT21L SKT 21LB No. SKT15L SKT21L SKT 21LB
D 82.17(3.235) 106.375(4.188) 139.719(5.5) t2 13(0.512) 17.5(0.69) 21(0.83)

D1 65(2.56) 88(3.46) 116(4.57) t3 4(0.157) 4(0.157) 5(0.2)
D2 104.8(4.125) 133.4(5.25) 171.4(6.75) t4 20(0.787) 20(0.787) 22(0.87)
D3 135.15(5.32) 215(8.46) 210(8.27) t5 3(0.118) 14.5(0.57) 15(0.59)
D4 80(3.15) 97(3.82) 110(4.33) LI 521.2(20.52) 553.5(21.79) 558(21.97)
D5 87(3.43) 115(4.53) 145(5.71) 551.2(21.7) 589.3(23.2) 600(23.62)
[100(3,94)] L2
D6 150(5.91) 135(5.32) 165(6.5) n-Zl 11-M10 11-M12 11-M16
D7 176(6.93) 155(6.1) 185(7.28) n-Z2 8-M6 8-M8 8-M12
dl 50(1.97) 65(2.56) 86(3.39) n-Z3 6-M10 4-M10 6-M10
d2 46(1.81) 59(2.32) 78(3.07) n-Z4 6-M10 3-M8
d3 16(0.63) 19.05(0.75) 23.81(0.94) Z5 10(0.394) 10.2(0.4) 14(0.55)
t 4.75(0.187) 4.1(0.161) 6.4(0.25) Z6 M6 M8 M10
tl 13(5.12) 14.3(0.563) 75.9(0.63) Z7 50(1.97) 30(1.18) 32(1.26)
1-24 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunom-KiH mncHinE
6-4. Major Dimensions of Sub Spindle
:WK.
-
\/ ;
t\
W. M. t®7
0
0111
0 65H7
in m £
CM S
:i=
elsn
O Lÿj
I
S 0 38
0 48
0 1 15h4
3-M10X1.5
/ /
/
/
f-€h- AiI-' f -
\
\
\
\
stf.
Fig. 3-8 Major Dimensions of Sub Spindle
1-25 -
HYurmni-KiR mncmnE m. SPECIFICATION
7. Chuck and Rotary Cylinder

7-1. Hollow Chuck Major Dimensions
C D J J< P
3E3B IS TI-
T
(a cc
t3-
LU U- € (3 < L
AH
SI 60“
2
aÿH 1.5
4_J
r
Fig. 3-9 Major Dimensions of Hollow Chuck and Soft Jaw
mm(in)
SKT15L SKT21L SKT 21LB SKT15L SKT21L SKT 21LB

No. No. SAMWOO/ SAMWOO/
SAMWOO Hwacheon SAMWOO Hwacheon Hwacheon Hwacheon
Hwacheon Hwacheon
165(6.5) J* 210(8.27)
A
*
123(4.84)
j* 254(10) K 35(1.38) 40(1.57) 40(1.57)
B 122(4.8) 147(5.79) 146(5.75) 175(6.89) L 6(0.24) 8(0.32) 10(0.39)
C 91(3.58) 90(3.54) 103(4.06) 102(4.02) 123(4.84) M 28(1.1) 40(1.57) 48(1.89)
D 32 44(1.73) 52(2.05) N 23(0.91) 35(1.38) 42(1.65)
E 104.8(4.13) 110(4.33) 133.4(5.25) 140(5.51) *171.46(6.75) O 12(0.47) 16(0.63) 16(0.63)
F 82.56(3.25) 106.375(4.19)
*139.72(5.5) P 20(0.79) 26(1.02) 31(1.22)
G
* 45(1.77) *52(2.05) *66(2.6) Q 15(0.59) 20(0.79) 21(0.83)
H M10-95L M12-110L M12-105L M16X125L R 20(0.79) 25(0.98) 32(1.26)
(3.74L) (4.33L) (4.13L) (4.9L)
I 2-M10 *17.5(0.69) *20(0.79)
2-M10 2-M10 S
* 19.5(0.77)
66.5(2.62) 85.5(3.37) T M10-25L M12-32L M12X32L
J 113(4.45)
(0.98L) (1.26L) (1.26L)
- 1-26 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunoni-Kifl mncmriE
7-2. Sub Spindle Chuck Major Dimensions
5(min)
15(MAX)
’lO(MAX)
, .5 . O(min) 27.3 120°
X
I— & \
9? \
-ai i- 5
\ \
to CO
T- CO
Fi
to
i
SS ®r .±
CO
19
1= 1 1= fV:
r -X
P0,
&
10.5 50
54 3-M10
22 16 <9.5>
60°
LO
o>
LO
CM CO
1 1.5 oK
47.5
39-
io
lO
CM
o
_ ml
11H9 7t
Fig. 3-10 Sub Spindle Chuck Major Dimensions
- 1-27 -
HYunDRi-KiR mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION
7-3 SUPER KIATURN 15L Hollow Chuck(6',
* 165)
s ffi frJSj
W; m1
Wtm&m
Chuck SAMWOO, Hwacheon
Cylinder SAMWOO, Hwacheon
7-3-1. Connecting Parts for Rotary Cylinder
/
4
3
./•
2
>
1 £\° /
\o
/
5
3
*/
/
6
.0
>
<2
Fig. 3-11 Connecting Parts for Cylinder

mm(in)
Item No. Remarks
No. Item Qty.
SAMWOO Hwacheon SAMWOO Hwacheon
1 Hydraulic Cylinder 1674-11-316-1 1344-11-101-3 1 SYH1239 HHH35CA6
2 Cylinder Flange 1674-11-313-0 1344-11-313-0 1

3 Hexagon Socket
SM1101010030 12 M10 x30L(1.18L)
Head Cap Screw
4 Draw Tube 1676-11-301-0 1654-11-306-0 1
5 Chuck 1674-11-315-1 1344-11-205-1 1 HAS-06 HH037M6
6 Soft Jaw 1674-11-317-0 KK007003 1 SET
1-28 -
ffl. SPECIFICATION HYuncmi-Kin mncHiriE
7-3-2. Major Dimensions mm
in
MAX 40(36) SAMWOO

MIN 28(23) (Hwacheon)
MAX 1.57(1.42)
628.2(622.2) MIN 1.1(0.9)
24.73(24.5)
-EE
-EE
s. s.
*£>
t§_ss-f &-§-?- 2 S. Z3SC StS S
£ 0.11(0.16) s.
isi 5 u;
s- i EM-
-E3
MAX 15(44) MAX 11(8)
MIN 0(29) MIN-K-5)
MAX 0.59(1.73) MAX 0.43(0.31)
MIN 0(1.14) MIN -0.04(-0.2)
91(90)
3.58(3.54)
Fig. 3-12 Major Dimensions of Connecting Parts for Cylinder
7-4. SUPER KIATURN 21 L Hollow Chuck (8', *210)
Name | Man.iBir.mriT
Chuck SAMWOO, Hwacheon
Cylinder SAMWOO, Hwacheon
7-4-1. Connecting Parts for Rotary Cylinder
4
7 .-'I
3
2
1
,y ..s
/ÿ /ÿ
5
i
r
I
I
I
iff 6
i , dm
Lÿ'
Fig. 3-13 Connecting Parts for Cylinder
1-29 -
HYuriDRi-KiH mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION
mm(in)
Item No. Remarks
No. Item Qty.
SAMWOO Hwacheon SAMWOO Hwacheon
1 Hydraulic Cylinder 1742-11-450-1 1742-11-118-1 1 SYH1239 HH36CA8
2 Cylinder Flange 1742-11-447-0 1742-11-202-0 1
3 Stud Bolt SM1008010030 4 M10x30L(1.18L)
4 Draw Tube 1742-11-432-0 1

5 Chuck 1742-11-449-0 1742-11-117-0 1 HAS-06 H037M8
6 Soft Jaw 1742-11-454-0 1742-11-443-0 1 SET
7 Hex. Nut SM1201001000 4 M10
7-4-2. Major Dimensions
SAMWOO
(Hwacheon)
MAX40(38.7)
MIN 24(20.7)
658
<aiojLriO EE
»! 1_ T TEE
rt:_
o
CO CD o o
CD
lO-- & SH
o St St St St 3(4), St CM
St
&l
St UL
T EFTn?--
r
a
:
'Yi F1
jr
MAX 22(47)
MIN 0(27) MAX 5(10)
MIN -11 (-8)
103(102)
Fig. 3-14 Major Dimensions of Connecting Parts for Cylinder
1-30 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunom-Kin mncmnE
7-5. Major Dimensions of Connecting Parts for Sub Chuck Cylinder
mm(in)
MAX1 0(0.39) MAX45 (1.77)

MINO MIN3(5|(1 .18)
315(012.4)
u I IE3
§3
LD
CO
<s
co
52.
n to
OJ
®
~
33-
s52.§S
_. S CO
ts> 52.
35
(1.38)
54
(2.13)
Fig. 3-15 Major Dimensions of Connecting Parts for Sub Chuck Cylinder
1-31 -
HYunnm-Kin mncmnE m. SPECIFICATION
8. Tool Post
8-1. Turret mm(in)
CO CO
CO CO
s.
CD
s
CO
O o £ o o o s
JO© 2L
£
Si
P Q
50(1),
13.8, 75 .12
S
13.8 75 _12_°
(0.54) (2.95) (0.47) (0.54) (2.95) (0.47)
370 (14.56)
185 185
(7.28) (7.28)
/®\ \ II @/°
7 r _
@© © .i1ÿ.
LQi of 1(0.59) (2ÿ6)
15,
(0.59)
o
7 C
©
o SIESR
">s>
o
a o g
CM I
H--J5
(1.77)
45
(1.77)
© @ © o
r±ii±zML_L[D_51
h-£T ' '
s
o/o © V \©
90(3.54)
®m©
>_
Fig. 3-16 Turret( SUPER KIATURN 15L/21L)
- 1-32 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunnni-KiH mncmriE
8-2. SUPER KIATURN 15L
•Base Holder
mm(in)
18 27 30 20 20 40 15
(0.71) (1.06) (1.18) (0.79) (0.79) (1.57) (0.59)
in oo
T
CM co
o C\J
tn
co
*H
o 'v r* Lrrir.v"x±: --V
m
co
CO
TZ.
pj
+ ]
35(1.38) 20 40(1.57) 5 20 49(1.96)

(0.79) (0.2) (0.79)
75(2.95)
95(3.74)
Fig. 3-17 I.D. Base Holder
mm(in)
28 35 40 20 40 J5[
(1.11) (1.38) (1.57) (0.79) (1.57) (0.59)
LO
CM
CO
CM
—
CO
r-
£
co
'Q :
I I
LO
ITV-r is !
o
CM
:±t= I
•! ! »
r 43(1.7)
20
(0.79) 40(1.57) 5|
(0.2)
70(2.75)
103(4.06) 75(2.95)
Fig. 3-18 Face Grooving Base Holder
1-33 -
HYurmm-Kin mncHiriE IH. SPECIFICATION
mm(in)
11° 1 2-09.7
30*0.05
'2.0 COOLANT (1.1)
HOLE +
; \ \i
A 03
\ \ *
$
<s>
!A /-
",
*v\ BY-"©A i ./
%o. (D
o
''V, v v'
*
D C'"' S '(S
wy® & m loi

© 5?
s
CO
~$f2y o
1,
== / g g
toj 5 &
v «s>
v3w
1 i4Sl?c..S?
§L
vtl
\
\
<©
/
'
©
/''/ *
//
r«
'
Y0
TB
K H
>s'
l\
D Y
O
12-010*0 005 55(2.17] 28
(1.1)
PIN HOLE 83*oi
(3.27)
Fig. 3-19 VDI 40 Turret(Live Tool Post)
1-34 -
HI. SPECIFICATION HYunnm-Kin mncHinE
8-3. SUPER KIATURN 21
•Base Holder
mm(in)
45(1.77) , 50(1.97),
m
5
C- ::=r!
5T
q
co
g q
CM
CO
1
if®u co
CO
o r-
JLÿ-L co •
-- - 4 -
r -I-
1,20,1(0-79) 5 70(2.75)
95(3.74) (0.2) 75(2.95)
Fig. 3-20 I.D. Base Holder
mm(in)
28 35 40 20 40 15
(1.11) (1.38) (1.57) (0.79) (1.57) (0.59)
5
CM
r- 43(1.7)
r -
(0.79)
20
103(4.06)
•or
40(1.57)
CM
co
LO
------
5|
(0.2)
.
lUZrt.
I
. . , I »
70(2.75)
75(2.95)
! — —
i) :J,
I
;
:}ÿ
I
s
i
Fig. 3-21 Face Grooving Base Holder
1-35 -
HYunoni-Km mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION
mm (in)
2-M8
25. 44.5 0.5(0.02)
(0.98) (1.75)
\ + J
\ n I S'
5 ii I
II !
II \wwvwvw
CO
s
r “ s
'“I g
s>
£
CM
9
CO
CM
1 *(0 35)
70(2.76) 63(1.42)
17 55.5 18
(0-67) (2.19) (0.71)
5 to
05
CM
«
CM
CO
LO
05
CM
CO
CM
s
o ©
90.5(3.56) 133(5.23)
Fig. 3-22 VDI O.D Holder
1-36 -
ffl. SPECIFICATION HYunom-KiR mncHinE
mm(in)
LO
lO 5
O o
C\j
o
&
CNJ :d
LO
ei
s L
_ o
E 9_
a (0.35)
35(1.38) 40(1,57)
75(2.95) 63(2.48)
138(5.43)
47.5(1.87) 47.5(1.87)
30(1.18) 45(1.77) 15.5, 64(2.52) 15.5
(0.61) (0.61)
O
£
as.
CD
&
c\j
CT>
3
a
o
UO
pr
s c\j
co
a
S
© 2-M12 a
g ®/
CD
g CO
o (f
a
s
-S
:
74(2,91) 1(0.04) 22.5 50(2) 22.5
(0.89) (0.89)
2-M8
Fig. 3-23 Back Surface Machining Composite Holder(VDI)
1-37 -
HYunnm-Kin mncmnE m. SPECIFICATION
mm(in)
\ÿwwvw5
1 g
5
O
>7
a
8 O r-
S
9_ 5
60(2.36) 63(2,48)
123(4,84)
15.5 64 15.5 15 45
(0.61) (2-52) (0.61) (0.59) (1.77)
8 I 3! I
sa is S
LO
r7j
o
2-M8
% %
§
I I
(2
S
a 2-M8
a
(?) £ ©
o
a
12.5 70 12.5 59 1
(2.76) 049 (2.32) (0.04)
Fig. 3-24 Back Surface Machining Composite Holder (VDI)
1-38 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunoHi-KiR mncHinE
mm(in)
25 24 24.5 0.5
(0.98) (0.94) *(0796) (0.02)
LO
c\i CM
c\ CM
8
3
CM
LO g
IS
"ÿVVWWWWN
y\
ss 'T.
in g
'.t
m
CM CM 9
c\ CM
(b.35f
137(5.39)
15.5 64 15.5 30(1.18) 45(1.77) 63(2.48)

(0.61) (2.52) (0.61)
CD
g
a> 8
in d g sr
2-M12 s
s
s
s.
o LO
cvi
CM
o si
d §
d
VO
LO
74(2.91) 0.5(0.02)
2-M8
Fig. 3-25 VDI O.D. Holder
1-39 -
HYunnni-Kin mncHinE m. SPECIFICATION
mm(in)
*rÿ- ii
£
s
s
5?rÿ- a
(0.35) ©
136(5.35)
63(2.48) 1(0 04) 72(2.83) 22.5 50

(0.88) (2) W
o St
Ro
2-M12
©
? *g
n
°
I
uo
LO
IS
S
5 5
3
45 28 15.5, 64 .15.5
(1.77) (1.1) (2.52) Pi)
Fig. 3-26 VDI Surface Holder
1-40 -
m. SPECIFICATION HYunoni-Kin mncwriE
mm(in)
Ml
5.4
(°.21,
40,6 27
(1.6) (D (1.06)
s
Q
W.
2.
otq O
SI e o
o s5
ei
11 75 12
(043? (2.95) (037?
2-M8
46 25 27
(1.81) (0.98) (1.06)
y
d 2S
SI O
I
O 5 o
s LO
CD
lO
§
at
<r
sr 20
§ 36(1.42)
A 42(1.65)
70(2,76) 5(0.2) 98(3.86)
Fig. 3-27 Back Surface Machining Composite Holder
I -41 -
HYurmm-Km mncmnE ffl. SPECIFICATION
mm(in)
M12
-ZX. a «I 5*
sld
a
uq
si I
a. 4k
•Or
© «I in
5 I
10 75(2.95) JO
(0.39) (0.39)
95(3.74)
lO ST
a
45(1.77) 50(1.97) , 40(1.57) 35(1.38)
e a
a
a
I
4-M8
§
a
S
o LO
CD
§
a
35 20 40 5(0.2) 70(2.76)
(1.38) (0.79) (1.57)
Fig. 3-28 Back Surface Machining Composite Holder
1-42 -
HYunoHi-Kin mHCHinE
m
i:
TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION

VI. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
1 . General F-5
2. Layout of Machine F-5
3. Transporter F-6
3-1. Crane F-7
3-2. Fork Lift F-9
4. Installation F-10
4-1 . Preparation to Install F-10
4-1-1. Installation Condition F-10
4-1-2. Foundation Work F-ll
4-2. Foundation Work F-12
4-2-1 . Without Using Foundation Bolt . F-13
4-2-2. Using Foundation Bolt(optional) F-13
5. Adjustment of Level F-14
6. Cleaning F-16
7. Lubrication and Oiling , F-17

7-1. Hydraulic Oil F-17
7-2. Oiling Wet Moving Parts in the X- and Z-axes F-17
7-3. Oiling Hydraulic Chuck F-18
8. Coolant F-19
T
||
9. Electric Power and Wiring IV -20
9-1 . Power Switch IV -21
9-2. Wiring to Machine from Power Switch IV -21
9-3. Changing Electric Units According to Voltage and Frequency IV -22
9-3-1 . Tab Changing for Controlling Transformer IV -22
9-3-2. External Transformer IV -23
9-4. Grounding IV -23
10. Disassembling and Cleaning Shipment Fixture IV -25
11 . Check Before Test Working IV -26
12. Required Dimension in Working IV -26

12-1. Tool Moving Range F-26
12-2. Tool Interference Diagram IV -29
12-3. Workpiece Interference Diagram of Q-Setter IV -33
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYurmm-KiFi mHcmnE
1. General
(1) This CNC lathe contains three major elements - Body of machine, the Electric Control
Panel, Hydraulic Unit, and etc. and each of them is connected with wires and
hydraulic pipes.
(2) Since all devices are attached to the body of machine, you can move it as necessary
without overhauling the machine.
(3) There are 2 methods of moving by crane or fork lift.
(4) To achieve the desired working, you should follow the installation procedures given in
this manual.
2. Layout of Machine
Figure 4-1 shows the dimension concerned when attaching special accessories, ie. the chip
box and chip conveyor to the body of machine.
mm(in)
S
00 2- IT
I
S
CD
s
S? / O
CO
CO
o
2950
(116.1)
1050
(41.3) 1650
E
(64.9)
ol
(E>OQ>
i I
<J
2950
(116.1)
Fig. 4-1 Layout of Machine
IV -5 -
HYunoni-KiH mncHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
3. Transporter
(1) There are 2 transporting methods by means of crane or forklift.
4 WARNING
1. When transporting the machine, be careful not to crach with other objects.
2. Never stand or walk under highly -lifted machine.
A CAUTION
1. Prior to transporting the machine, check each part of the machine is prop¬
erly fixed to each other.
2. When lifting the machine, slowly do a job, ensuring a full balance.
3. Be careful not to give a shock to the body of machine, the Electric Control
Panel, and other electric devices.
4. Transport the coolant tank after removing it from the body of machine.
- F-6 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYurmni-KiH mncwnE
3-1. Crane
Name Weight
SUPER KIATURN 15LMS 4,300 Kgf(43,OOON)
SUPER KIATURN 21LMS 4,300 Kgf(43,000N)
Bed Edge
Bed Edge
vu
\
P
A
aV Transporting
Fixture
Fig. 4-2 Transport by Crane
ff-7 -
HYurmni-Kin mncmnE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
(1) The crane-working method is shown in Figure 4-2.

(2) When transporting by crane, ensure the followings.
1) Adjust the center by moving the saddle and cross slide so that they are loaded at the
center of hanged angle.
2) Set the angle of wire rope within 90° and to 60° if possible.
3) The capacities of wire rope and crane are as follows.
a. wire rope over 16 mm in diameter
b. crane over 5 ton in load
4) Place where the wire rope is to be attached.
a. both edges of bed
b. Fixture for transporting
A CAUTION
1. With the machine lifted slightly, check all sides for balance and the rope is
reached to the cover or other parts.
2. When more than 2 persons have to lift the machine, they should work
together, communicating each other.
3. Do not use rusty or shorted wire ropes.
4. When lifting the machine, slowly do a job. If the wire rope is tightened,
temporarily stop and check an eye bolt is clamped and then lift up to the
desired height.
5. When pulling down, also do it slowly. Just before reached the floor, stop it
and check the position and then pull down completely.
6. Only the experienced -personnel should perform a crane work.
F-8 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunnmi-Kin mncHinE
3-2. Fork Lift
A CAUTION
1. Only who has the forklift driver’s license can convey the machine by
forklift.
2. To avoid damage around the protruded part of machine, the task should be
performed by two persons, of which one is a supervisor.
3. Put down the machine slowly not to give a shock on the floor.
4. Hold wood between the forklift and the machine for lifting.
•Insert the fork into guide slot in the lower front of the machine.
© /
HSSSSS
oZZ°°°'
Q,
« Wood
§
Fig. 4-3 Transport by Fork Lift
IV -9 -
HYUriDHI-KIH mRCHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
4. Installation
A WARNING
1. Before installing the machine, read and understand the safety notice thor¬
oughly in this manual.
2. While installing, there should be no oil or water on the floor to prevent the
workers from slipping.
3. Before working, check again it is installed at a proper place.
4-1. Preparation to Install
4-1-1. Installation Condition
When installing the machine, avoid places as below.

1) Under direct ray of sun and near by heating elements and where the indoor temp.
is changed rapidly.
2) Heavy dust and high humidity area.
3) Near the vibrating machine.
4) Where foundation is weak.
5) Where ground uneven or inclined.
A CAUTION
1. If you have to install the machine around vibrating objects, install the shock
absorbing pad around it.
2. It is required to prepare space for maintenance, if optional accessory was
attached (See Fig. 4-1).
17-10 -
IV TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunoRi-Kin mncHinE
4-1-2. Foundation Work
When installing the machine tool, the foundation should be solid. This ensures the best
integrity of cutting in the machine. But, it greatly depends on the nature of ground
where the factory is located, for example whether it is rocky or filled -in.
Observe the general knowledge of machine tool and the related notice.
A CAUTION
2
1. The strength of ground has to be over 5 ton/ mm and the thickness over
300 mm.
2. The foundation has to be over 300 mm of bed in circumference.
3. When installing the shock absorbing pad, place it around boundary of
foundation.
4. Do not use the foundation which is divided into small concrete blocks only
supporting each level.
It is very important to locate the machine in proper place. You have to check the
inter-ruption of machine operator which chip removing and maintenance like; pulling
chip cart removing covers for maintenance.
No. Name and Number Figure Qty.
1
SM1017020080 S 5
(Levelling Bolt)
M20
M20
SM1217002000
2 5
(Levelling Nut)
W-ll -
HYurmni-KiR mncHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
No. Name and Number Figure Qty.
SM9001020000
3 5
(Levelling Seat)
M16
4 Foundation Bolt 400 5
1676-09-301-0
5
(Level Plate) <s> 1
4-2. Foundation Work
A CAUTION
Special attention should be paid to the foundation work since it have great
influence on maintaining the accuracy of working and initial installing for a
long time.
1) To install the machine, it needs the concrete floor over 300 mm in thickness. Put the
levelling seat under the levelling bolt.
2) To maintain machine accuracy, install new concrete ground at the place where has less
than 300 m in thickness(See Para. 4-5, Foundation Work).
IV -12 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunoni-Kin mncmriE
4-2-1. Without Using Foundation Bolt
1) Put the levelling seat at the place shown in foundation diagram.
2) After inserting the levelling bolt in the machine, put it above the levelling seat with
about 10 mm distance from the upper side of levelling seat.
3) Adjust the levelling bolt, set the level of machine correctly and then tighten the level¬
ling nut.
Fig. 4-4 Installation of Levelling Bolt
4-2-2. Using Foundation Bolt (optional)

1) Place the machine at the place to be installed and perform the 1st levelling work. If the
levelling seat is out of its position or it is impossible to adjust it with the levelling bolt
due to poor foundation, use a wedge to do a levelling work.
2) After completion on the first levelling work, insert the foundation bolt from the bot-tom
of machine and install it to the machine using nuts.
3) Fill the mortar up to the bottom and the side of levelling seat and stir it with a bar.
4) Adjust the levelling bolt, complete levelling work in all sides, and then engage the foun¬
dation bolt tightly.
F-13 -
HYUnDHI-KIH mHCHiriE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
Foundation
Bolt
Seat Mortar
Concrete
Gravel
TS-s&Sf.
-v.v.»V'8.-ÿaggi8-iV. 10~15mm :°o-
°Jo\ ,00
mm--
hv°yo°'ol
°‘o°o"
SS«4>
<v alas; 800
mm
r:..m I. Of 0. if *°
1000 mm
A o
!£»
:
.‘O 0
Fig. 4-5 Foundation Work
5. Adjustment of Level
(1) The levelling method is one of the factors to determine the degree of machine.
(2) Levelling the machine is the most basic work and have an influence on the degree of
the workpiece and the life of machine itself.
(3) Perform levelling in the following order.
1) Install the machine on the floor to be installed as shown in the chapter 4,
“Installation”.
2) Attach the level plate to the turret as shown in Fig. 4-6.
3) Place the level above the level plate.
IV -14 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunoni-Kin mncHinE
o® 5
§ o
Level
o 0
Q)
© *0
ss ©
»0.
£
Level Plate
Fig. 4-6 Adjustment of Level
4) Move the level much as the full feed in 2-axis[430 mm(16.93 in)] and then read the
result. At this time, adjust the level using the levelling bolt so that the difference
from the reading is ±0.04 mm/m( ±0.00157 in/40 in)
Level Tolerance 0.04 mm/m(0.00157in/40in)

Level Accuracy 1 scale = 0.02 mm/m(0.00079in/40in)
5) Handle the used level enable to maintain the same level in the same direction.
CAUTION
1. Keep the contact face of level clean to prevent dust, etc. from penetrating
the level in measuring.
2. Uncontrolled level of the machine may result in malfunction due to dec¬
lination or worn at the wet moving part or bed.
3. When moving the level, be careful not to be interfered with chuck and tail
stock.
(4) In the last horizontial levelling, do a job with the foundation bolt and nut tightened
firmly.
IV -15 -
HYunom-Kin mncHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
(5) After installing the machine, perform the levelling as follows.
For 2-3 days after installing the machine Daily
for 6 months Monthly
after 6 months Quarterly
6. Cleaning
(1) When transporting the machine, there is a risk of mixing with sand or dust. Therefore
secure the saddle or cross slide before cleaning.
(2) Because each part of this machine has tightened at factory, loosen and then clean it.
(3) When cleaning the machine, wipe out the anticorrosive paint using soft cotten clothes
wet with kerosene or benzene.
LIP
CD
{°ooooo°l
ri-
Xr
LBTZLT 0
(4) Remove the moisture all over the machine completely.
A CAUTION
When cleaning, do not use compresed air. Otherwise, it may cause damage
allowing foreign matters to enter into the crevice by air pressure.
- nr-i6 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunnm-Km mncmnE
7. Lubrication and Oiling
(1) Perform oiling at the positions as shown in Figs. 4-7, 4-8, and 4-9.
(2) Table 4-1 shows the recommended lubrication and oiling.
7-1. Hydraulic Oil

1) Fill up the quantity of oil to the degree higher than that of oil gage (after filled up,
it is recommended that the level is met with the standard level of oil gage).
2) Quantity of oil is 15 liter(3.92 gal).
Fig. 4-7 Filling Hydraulic Oil
3) After this, perform oiling as specified.
7-2. Oiling Wet-Moving Parts in the X- and Z-axes

1) Fill oil in the lubrication tank in front of bed.
2) The quantity is about 1.8 liter (0.47 gal).
3) If the oil is exhausted in the tank, the red lamp will be illuminated on the Operating
Panel. Then, fill it up.
a
Fig. 4-8 Filling Lubrication Oil
IV -17 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
7-3. Oiling Hydraulic Chuck

Fill up the chuck daily while opening and closing it by means of the grease gun.
D)
Ol
om
Fig. 4-9 Greasing Chuck
Table 4-1. Lubrication Oiling Table
Place Method Quantity Period ISO Spec. Maker Used Oil
SHELL TELLUS
SHELL
OIL C32
CB32
Hydraulic Half- ESSO TERESSO 32
or
tank Yearly MOBIL DTE OIL
HL32 MOBIL
LIGHT
CALTEX FBK OIL R032
SHELL TONA OIL
SHELL
Wet If the T68
lubrication
moving Forced lack lamp G68 ESSO FABIS K-68
part illuminated MOBIL VACTORA
MOBIL
OIL No.2
SHELL ALBANIA 2
Manual
Hydraulic Oiling Daily DOW MOLY KOTE
fully More than CC460 CORNING BR2-S
chuck Grease one time
MOBILUS
Gun MOBIL
GREASE 2
- F-18 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunnni-Kin mncmriE
8. Coolant
There are several kinds of coolant such as soluble and insoluble ones. The methods of
filling coolant into this machine are as follows.
(1) Fill coolant into its tank in the rear of machine.

(2) Quantity of coolant is 185 liter.
*
I
coolant tank 185 liter (49 gal)
Coolant tank
Fig. 4-10 Filling Coolant
(3) When installing the machine, performing test operation or having not used for long¬
term, use the spare sufficiently.
F-19 -
HYunDHi-Kin mncmriE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
(4) Notice When Using Soluble Coolant

1) When selecting soluble coolant, select one in consideration of the lubrication, settle¬
ment, anticorrosive, foaming device, unmixing with oil, safety, and so on.
2) Before starting or after stopping the work, remove chips and clean up soluble coolant
attached on each wet moving part, tool post turning part, and cross slide. After that,
always apply lubrication oil lightly.
3) Exchange the soluable coolant if corroded.
A CAUTION
1. Because soluable coolant is anti-corrosive treated, it is good in wet condition
but easy to be corroded in a dry state. After a completion of work, do not
forget to apply anti-corrosive oil on the wet moving part.
2. The soluble coolant has an alkali factor and may remove fat from the per¬
sonal skin. So, Be careful of worker’s health.
3. For the dilution method and agent of soluable coolant, follow the manufac¬
turer’s instruction because they are different depending on its kind.
4) For the dilution method and agent of soluble coolant, follow the manufacturer’s
instruction because they are different depending on its kind.
9. Electric Power and Wiring
A CAUTION
For the electric device (welder, high-frequency seasoning device, electric spark
machine, and etc.) occurring high-frequency noise, use the independent
switchboard or install it away from over 20 m.
_\ I
-
over 20m
IV -20 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYUnDHI-KIH mRCHinE
9-1. Power Switch
Install other machines with the independent power switches at the place where easy to
open and close. See the following table for the capacity of fuse.
O Xsa
LPft Pi mm
M 3
m HW
9-2. Wiring to Machine from Power Switch
Perform wiring to the 1st QF1 through leading hole located in the lower left of the
Electric Control Panel. For the thickness of wire, see the following table and connect it so
far the R.S.T not to be changed.
*
u y
Leading Hole
Power Capacity Available Wire [mm2] Fuse

Model
(kVA) R.S.T. Grounding line [A]
SUPER KIATURN 15LMS 30 22 14 100 A
SUPER KIATURN 21LMS 30 22 14 100A
IV -21 -
HYunoni-Kin mncHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
9-3. Changing Electric Units According to Voltage and Frequency.
A CAUTION
If the voltage fluctuated seriously, it may cause misoperation of the machine
and failure of the electric and electronic parts. Therfore, set the fluctuating
rate not to exceed ±10%.
According to the voltage and frequency of the power of factory, it needs to change the
setting of electric applications. Prior to changing, check its voltage and frequency.
1) power voltage 200/220V ± 10%
2) power frequency 50/60Hz ± 1Hz
9-3-1. Tab Changing for Controlling Transformer

Open the door of the Electric Control Panel, remove the plastic cover of Transformer
and then change the wiring as shown in the following table.
R2 ©
J=
T2
Voltage R2 T2
191-210 V 200 V 0 V
211-240 V 220 V 0 V
- F-22 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYuriDHi-KiR mncHinE
9-3-2. External Transformer
A CAUTION
Transformer for 220V power supply
The transformer should be installed by the customer’s direct purchase. This
company can’t provide any external transformer for the 220V power supply.
But the specific feature of a transformer should follow as below.
1) Available only to EN 60742 (Please use authorized products)
2) Feature
- Capacity : Above 30 (KVA)
- Voltage - Primary : 380 —440 (V)
- Secondary : 200— 220 (V)
&£ *
Power Supply Switch External Transformer / Electric Box
9-4. Grounding
A WARNING
Only authorized engineer can do earth working. Failure to comply may result
in personal severe injury, death, or accident.
1) All electric devices should be grounded to prevent personal injury and misoperation of
the machine according to the specification, after installed.
2) Select the grounding point as close to the machine as possible and perform wiring inde¬
pendently.
- ff -23 -
HYunDni-Kin mncHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
3) Do the third-class grounding only by the authorized engineer.

a. The third-class grounding
- Grounding resistance '• under 100 Q
- Thickness of wire : 1.5 times as that of power supply in thickness.
At least 14 mm2
- Measuring :
device 500V Megger
4) Grounding Method
The machine should be grounded by one of the following methods.
a. Individual grounding
* \Z JH_I
m
it ir ±J 'ilir m
E
b. Common grounding
a ii,
i
m a ;Sff
oi
* The grounding line of each machine should be grounded at its ground ter¬
minal directly. (Only one line to one terminal)
100
* Grounding resistance = [0]
number of machine
c. Never ground in the following methods
HI
m im
!ÿ!
- ff-24 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunDRi-Kin mRCHinE
10. Disassembling and Cleaning Shipment Fixture
When shipped, each axis is fixed by shipment fixture for a safety.
A WARNING
NEVER operate the machine before disassembling the shipment fixture.
After disassembling the shipment fixture, unless otherwise stated, clean the applied
anticorrosive agents with light or cleaning oil and apply the cleaned part with lubricating
oil for sliding.
A CAUTION
Do not use oil or kinds of chemicals which may affect the painting of body.
Be careful of a fire.
The location of the shipment fixture is shown in the following figure (yellow painting).
Shipment Fixture (yellow)
vo
1
1EL W
0
- IV -25 -
HYurmm-Kin mncHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
11. Check Before Test Working

Before test working, make sure the followings.
(1) Check all the fixtures for transport or shipment are removed.
(2) Check any part or accessory is omitted.
(3) Check the lubricating, operating oil, and coolants are supplied properly.
(4) Check the coolant tank is located properly.
12. Required Dimension In Working

12-1. Tool Moving Range
•Variable array tool post stroke
35.2
LO
CO
7
15LS
95 550
40 120 21LS
2
85 _35
100
r43 86
-_!S
s
OJ 140
27.3 50
788,5
SKT15LS/21LS O.D TOOL
15LS
50 70
35.2 47 550 21LS
40 72
-I__ £3
CO
, : .
°
mmm m8 40 50
as
8
788,5
I”
= 140
s5”
SKT15LS/21LS I.D TOOL
- F-26 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunnni-KiR mncHinE
15LM
54 550 93 76 21LM
79
35,2
40 CO
/ZJ
CO
m itmm 60t Bn §
CM
so CM
O
o
CM
<€}
144
695 108.3,
SKT15LM/21LM LIVE TOOL
15LM
70 75 21LM
35.2 550
E3
40
95
120
/ZJ
£ÿ: 77 V)
CO
5
g 137 o i«0
695 108.3,
SKT15LM/21LM O.D(I.D) TOOL
- IV -27 -
HYunoHi-Kin mncmnE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
15LMS
93 76 21LMS
35.i> 1QQ 550 CO 3 CO

>L
sfW-
40 125 CM
s
2 <£,;•
.
H s'L
tr
* " : “
.. *
,
305
SKT15LMS/21LMS LIVE TOOL
15LMS
75 , 60 21LMS
LO
35.2
40
91
116
550
CO
81 n
M
o
§
-
S~TT
S
Jÿ§ I
in o
T •
& 88.
1
o
305
788.5
SKT15LMS/21LMS O.D(I.D) TOOL
IV -28 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunnHi-Kin mncHinE
12-2. Tool Interference Diagram
1) SKT15LS Interference Diagram
/
/
.X4
,.75ÿ6
/><> V V'') <o
\ a" OS/.-TN
! 0165ji§3 F s' a>j>ÿ
'10M
3g/(§)
(ft
©
W 1\
0 <
'W9He
0 ft7
I rt-fi
7(0)1
TRr 'ÿ568J: 7l\
T--~ —.-
r
or,
l
-vl \
\
\ .A
j
A
\4py
<© !
/
cv?ÿ
®,j© /
4> t
- AT -29 -
HYUnOfll-KIR mflCHinE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
2) SKT21LS Interference Diagram
<o
>5
/> <o
-f
l® 3
I 0A65ÿ 1/
x
0 4<
/
m i !
/x. \
<D
»«
/ .0. \
0 prl®
1 11
@
mi
© X
H
I
tÿP~
joK
I
Sÿresj)
\
->4
© a
yA
•/
©, k©
\S/
cyA®
®,l© /
/
/
/
- F-30 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunDHi-KiR mncHinE
3) SKT15M/21M/15LM/21LM Interference Diagram
/
/ a
&
/ / X vo9' \
,/C Cv \ \
! \ \
/
/ / \ \
! \ \
\
3
ft
\
*9
\ i -t
un
>\
\
\
\
\
L /
!
/
/
B 60 / g'«;
/
\ / i
\\
\
---
3
£J 55<9
1 -
- F-31 -
HYUflDHI-KIH mHCHIflE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
4) SKT15LMS/21LMS Interference Diagram
/
/
/
y
\
V
_/
i c?io( 8"j
l
i
0
\
<s
/
\
s.
\
\
J.
/
! \, x
/
T 7 /
/
o \
0 <z» i /
V»6 ’ Vi-" v
r— 20
0 3
\
\
v
\
s 7
/
/
i
/
\ •q. /
/
x \
/
/
\ /
\
£33
.
O
CD
/
>£§?«
020
(<*f) 45
- F-32 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunDRi-Kin mncHinE
12-3. Workpiece Interference Diagram of Q-setter
You can use the Q-setter when the lengths of drill or tap are less than the standard
60 mm(2.36 in).
1) SKT15LMS(SKT15LS)
mm(in)
1
*o
"g
<D
294.8(11.6)
91(3.58) 31(1.22) g 172.8(6.8)
125(4.92) I 53(2.09)
s
.§ 10101010101010
o
JD
2
I BB s
sees II1
S
\
c \
u
\
o §S S
3, l 1 CO £ s Z~r cr>
I
i
•s 3 ill
-8-
i 0 0CO
to
CO
2
'§
S 0
.§ 0.
Q
CO
CM
0,
'0 55°
0,
- nr -33 -
HYunnni-Kin mncHmE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
2) SKT21LMS(SKT21LS)
mm (in)
I
X3
g
290(11.4) 1 288(11.34)| JB
42(1.65) w 144(5.67)1113(4.45)1
|S2(2.05)| 92(3.62) ° 73(2.87)
171(2.8)1 g
•S
Q 10101010101010
§
!Jin o> CT>
CO CO
<=» <=>
.3
\
\
8 \
li
S'
£s
5§
IS
sS I
23 V
CO
0 o>
'o 52 uo m s CM CO
5
CO
o
*®L
V- o> to CO
'a 'Ss'o>
P 0y
?
S'
CO
55“
—SZLy
-f f
0
* I l : Big Bore Type
- F-34 -
IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION HYunnni-Kin mncHinE
3) Tooling System
SKT15/21/21L
A Boring Bar Socket

15: 0f XV
Boring Holder
Piece
Boring Holder
Mf)
I.D Tool Holder
(*tn
O.D Tool
<ÿ!•)
Drill
$7
Drill Socket
El
MT1XMT2 MT2
FACE Tool Holder
(ÿV)
lOpL) (Opt)
$0%
U-Drill U-Drill Sleeve A
U-Drill Holder
0,
'0
SKT15LS/21LS
3 4 2
o 12 STATION
Boring Bar Socket
15: dfj.f
2I/21L : U-Drill Holder Piece
Mf
A-
Boring Holder
CO
Boring Bar Socket 9
•rwwr
» 3/4*x1/2' I.D Tool Holder FACE Tool Holder
{ÿ!*) O.D Too!
mvi
Drill
Drill Socket
W) J Boring Holder
MT1XWT2 MT2 l/O.D Tool Holder C1-)
ton
f Dpt.) (Opt)
1
\
$3 ,0jgsj i*
Boring Bar Socket

U-Drill U-Drlll Sleeve
W.1Mf) U-Drill Holder
Mf * vxi/r
- IV -35 -
HYurmm-KiR mncmriE IV. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION
SKT15M/15LM/21M/21LM
© r N *0
Tap
Tapping Collet
ET32
(10 piecee) © aD Tool Holder
(0 1)
AjoetMllingb
Drilling Unit © O.DTool
(OH
End mil FACE Tool Holder

(ÿ«)
© ©
Boring Bar Socket
Center Drift
© ,
Redid Milling 6
Drifting Unit © d 1V*i/2*
dtVx3#4*
V divert’
Boring Holder
CPCD
Milling Collet I.D Tool Holder
ER32470
(18 pieces)
Drill Socket
Drill
CD MJ2 Drift
Qp (IOPU f(OpO
i*. Rug
U- Drill Sleeves
0 Os
Reemer
o„° U-DrB Tool Holder U-Oril
__
SKT 15LMS/21LMS 0.; .0\°
0 0o
© 0 0 .
\0„0/ÿ 0 CD
o *
%
Tep
Tapping Cdlet
ET32
(10 plecee) © OJ5 Tool Holder
(ÿ 1) .
FACE Tool Holder
(OD
V
Axil I Mlllng &
Drilling Unit
V VDI 40 CDl CD) O.D Tool
(ÿ!•)
12 STATION Piece
End mil Double O.DT/Hdde
(01)
CD CD
V
\«g)
Center Dr*
©
Red tel Milling &
Drilling Unit O.D/ID Tool Holder
(01. V)
CD)
'aw
Miffing Collet
ER32470 *Q
CD Boring Bar Socket
01V1/2*
0V*jW
I (18 piecee)
J 0
I.D Tod Holder
Drill l*V)
©
GP 3
Boring Holder
Plug
Boring Bar Socket
Reamer © •
t
I Vx1/2‘
lt4>W
Copt)
HOPU
I.D Tool Holder ©
3
U- Drill SI oeve* Drill Socket
U- Drill U-Drill Tod Holder
V y MT2 Drill
IV -36 -
HYunoni-KiH mncHinE
m REPAIR AND PRESERVATION

r
s V . REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
1SSI
1 . Mechanical Overview V-7

1-1. Mechanical Construction V-7
1-2. Moving Range of Axis V-8
1-3. Reference Point Adjustment of Each Axis V -9
1-3-1. Reference Point Adjusting Method 1 V -9
1-3-2. Reference Point Adjusting Method 2 V -13
I
1-3-3. Z-axis Dog and Limit Switch Attached Position V-20
1-4. X- and Z-axes Backlash Adjusting Method V -21
1-5. Q-Setter Position Adjustment V -23
I
'!
2. General Check and Repair V “26
2-1. General V -26
1
2-2. Check and Repair Items
2-3. Daily Check and Repair
•— V_28
V-29
1I
2-3-1. Inside of the Machine V -29 I
2-3-2. Outside of the Machine V -31
2-3-3. Checking Oil Flow V -32
2-3-4. Checking Pressure V -33
2-3-5. Filling and Changing Oil V -34
2-3-6. Around the Machine •••• V -36
2-4. Weekly Check and Repair V -36
2-4-1 . Inside of the Machine V -36
- -•
m wmmmsmm
I
2-5. Monthly Check and Repair V -38
2-5-1 . Inside of the Machine V -38
2-5-2. Filling and Changing Oil ¥-39
2-6. Six-monthly Check and Repair V -40
2-6-1. Filling and Changing Oil V -40
2-6-2. Around the Machine V -45
2-7. Yearly Check and Repair |
V -5°
2-7-1. Around the Machine V -50 1
2-8. Check and Repair Before Long-term Storage V -51
2-9. Check and Repair Before Operation Since Long-term Storage V -52
3. Maintenance of Major Units V -54

3-1. Spindle V -54
3-1-1 . Adjustment of Degree in Spindle ¥-54
3-1-2. Cleaning Front Cover of Spindle ¥-55
3-2. X- and Z-Axes ¥-56
3-2-1. X- and Z-Axes Constructions ¥-56
3-2-2. Restoring Torque Limiter ¥-56
3-3. Tool Post ¥-58
3-3-1. Tool Post Construction ¥-58
3-3-2. Tool Post Home Position Setting ¥-59
3-3-3. Adjustment and Exchange of clamp, l
Unclamp and Limit Switches ¥-61
3-3-4. Restoration in Collision of Turret ¥-62
R
3-4. Hydraulic V -63
3-4-1. Hydraulic Circuit Diagram . V -63
3-4-2. Repairing Hydraulic Tank V -64
3-4-3. Pressure and Flow Adjustment V -66
3-4-4. Repairing Manifold V -68
3-5. Lubrication Device V -72
3-5-1. Place to be lubricated V -72
3-5-2. Cleaning Lubrication Unit - V -73
3-5-3. Discharge of Lubricating Oil V -76
3-6. Coolant V -77
3-6-1. Coolant Unit Construction V -77
3-6-2. Specification and Cleaning V -78
3-6-3. Check and Repair V -80
3-7. Tail Stock V -81
3-7-1 . Tail Stock Construction V -81
3-7-2. Tail Stock Operation and Adjustment of Degree V -81
3-7-3. Proximity Swtich Setting Method V -86
3-7-4. Motor Specification V -87
3-8. Chuck and Cylinder V -87
3-8-1 . Chuck and Cylinder Construction V -87
3-8-2. Adjustment V -88
3-8-3. Specification V -89
3-9. Cover V -92
3-9-1. Door Roller V -92 1
3-9-2. Door Safety Glass V -92 1
3-10. Electricity V -93
3-10-1 . Electric Device Layout V -93
3-1 0-2. Alarm Lamp(Option) •• V -94
3-10-3. Alarm Indicator V -94
3-10-4. Parameter V-97
3-10-5. Exchanging Method of Battery V-97 I
3-1 0-6. Servo Amp for Tool Post V -98
3-10-7. Alarm Related to Spindle V -ill
3-10-8. Alarm List V -121
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDRi-KiH mncHinE
1. Mechanical Overview
1-1. Mechanical Construction
Electric Control
Panel
X-axis Motor
Saddle
X-axis
Turret
o°
Tool Post
Z-axis
&A
Head stock
iVÿ
$ s a
5'
Tail Stock
*5 Bed
Z-axis Motor
Rotary Cylinder
M £
B.
0
Spindle Motor aK Coolant Tank
e
Lubrication Pump /I
A.
Hydraulic
Manifold
Hydraulic Motor
Fig. 5-1 Mechanical Construction - Major Unit
V -7 -
HYuncmi-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
1-2. Moving Range of Axis
Up/Down direction vertically with the center of Spindle

X-Axis + : in tool post upward
- : in tool post downward
Up/Down direction horizontally with the center of Spindle

Z-Axis + : in the right direction of tool post movement
- : in the left direction of tool post movement
4 CAUTION
It is based when the operator stands in front of the machine.
. -r?
-X-
ry -"1
i
.
-x
vm
•Mif.
,cr-
; /
/} is
X;,
35
Wv/ k
"-x
't
-xX
-~s
p?\
!h (
/ÿY<
H. 1
<x
Fig. 5-2 Moving Range of Axis
V -8 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUnDHI-KIH ITIHCHmE
1-3. Reference Point Adjustment of Each Axis
Reference point may be changed and resetted for repairing and checking or due to the
collision of tool post. This time, the reference point should be adjusted in the following
orders.
A CAUTION
Reference point is the unique position determined by the parameter of NC
device and the dog & limit switch of machine.
1-3-1. Reference Point Adjusting Method 1

In case that "rMACHINE( ABSOLUTE) j” coordinate value is less than reference
point, adjust it in the following method.
1) Initiate running distance

Initiate the Reference Point Return Running Distance entered.
a. Select the setting screen and make the parameter change valid.
t
p| Press [SETTING] key key
\\
PARAMETERWRITE |INPUT|
SETTING (HANDY) 00000 NOOOOO

PARAMETERWRITE =I(0:DISABLE TENABLE)
TV CHECK 0(0: OFF 1: ON )
= 1(0:
PUNCH CODE = EIA 1: ISO )
INPUT UNIT = 0(0: MM 1: INCH)
I/O CHANNEL = 0(0-3: CHANNEL NO. )
SEQUENCE NO. = 0(0: OFF 1: ON. )
TYPE FORMAT = 0(0: 1: F10/11)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0( ( PROGRAM NO. )
SEQUENCE STOP = 11 SEQUENCE NO. )
> OS 100 % L 0%
MDl 16:18:08
[OFFSET] ABU) [ 1 [ (OPRT) ]
V-9 -
HYunnni-KiH mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
b. Initiate the Reference Point Return Distance by selecting parameter screen.

c. Make parameter change invalid, turn off and then re-apply the power.
2) X-Axis Reference Point Adjustment

a. Attach Dial Gauge(1/100) at holder and then secure in chuck.
A CAUTION
If using Magnet Stand instead of Fixture, it may be curved over 0.1 mm.
b. Put the I.D. base holder near to indicator using feed handle and set the motion to “0”
in the X direction.
»i
,%>
//
CL
a
c. Select the package position screen.
ACTUAL POSITION 00020 N00020

(RELATIVE) (ABSOLATE COORDINATE)
U 246.912 X 123.456
W 913.780 Y 456.890
g [ALL] (MACHINE)
X
Y
0.000
0.000
MACHING PARTS NO.

JOG F 2000
RUNTIME OH ISM CYCLE TIME OHOM38S
ACT. F 3000 MM/MIN OS 100 % L 0%
MEM STRT MTN **ÿ 09:06:35
[ABS) [REL] [ALL] [(0PRT)1
v-io -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunoni-KiR mncHinE
d. Set the mode to Handle Z, move the turret head in the + direction of Z-axis not to
be interfered with Tail Stock.
HANDLE'
00
[i j (5
/
1
&
01
lOJ
J.
u<J fe r
u 'Oj
OP'j
j)
G
»ÿ*
e. The differences between reference point position in X-axis and the coordinate value of
MACHINE become a running distance.
3) Z-Axis Reference Point Adjustment.
a. To approach the outer diameter bite

tool to chuck and protect the blade -
I 1 HANDLE
end, use a thin piece of paper, feed

the handle and approach the tip
00
(i | (i
/
1
S'
end of bite tool to the jaw section

l X I fe 0,
/
until the paper is not moved.
b. Select the package position screen.
ACTUAL POSITION 00020 N00020

(RELATIVE) (ABSOLATE COORDINATE)
U 246.912 X 123.456
W 913.780 . Y 456.890
0 [ALL] (MACHINE)
X
Y
0.000
0.000
MACHING PARTS NO.
JOG F 2000
RUNTIME OH15M CYCLE TIME OH OM38S
ACT. F 3000 MM /MIN OS 100 %L 0%
MEMSTRTMTN *** 09:06:35
'
I ABS ] |REL) (ALL! ) [ (OPRT) ]
v-ii -
HYunnni-Kin mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
c. Set the mode to Handle X, move the turret head in the + direction of X-axis, and
make it not to be disturbed in Tail Stock (Special Accessory)
-
I 1 HANDLE-
I 1 -r
00 /
/ *
o
30
E3
0.
1}
d. The differences between reference point position in Z-axis and the coordinate value of
MACHINE become the grid shift amount.
4) Input Running Distance

a. Make the parameter change valid according to para. 1).
b. Calculate the running distance
If the [MACHINE] coordinate is set to 377.268 and 402.754 for 380,000 in the X-axis and
405 in the Z-axis, the running distance of each axis will be calculated as follows.
•X-axis distance = initial value + (380.000-377.268) X 1000

= 1000+2732 = 3732
•Z-axis distance = initial value + (405.000-402.754) x 1000
= 1000+2246 = 3246
4 CAUTION
In case that “MACHINE” coordinate value is more than the reference point
distance, it is required to adjust the deceleration dog.
c. Change the parameter.
V -12 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-KiR mncmriE
1-3-2. Reference Point Adjusting Method 2
In case that “MACHINE (ABSOLUTE)” coordinate value is more than the reference
point distance, adjust in the following method.
1) Initialize running distance

Initialize the running distance as in “Zero Adjusting Method 1”, turn off and then
re-apply the power.
2) X-axis mm (in)
SKT15
Vl'A SKT21
\
i
0
ora A /
(o/y
V-A'>
Fig. 5-3 Moving Range of X-Axis
Set the distance to the center of I.D. Base holder from that of spindle at
380.000(SKT15) and 314. 000(SKT21) in the + direction.
a. Attach Dial Gauge (1/100) at holder and then secure in chuck.
A CAUTION
If using Magnet Stand instead of Fixture, it may be curved over 0.1 mm.
b. Make I.D. base holder in

proximity to indicator using
feed handle and set the
motion in X direction to
'SKS5
o
OBk' pu/
U
“0”.
V -13 -
HYunDRi-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
c. Set the coordinate “X” to “0”.
ra fxc] fo7] fÿ]
d. Set the mode to Handle Z, move the turret head in the + direction of Z-axis and make it
not to be interfered with Tail Stock.
HANDLE mm
00
[5
[5 ]
/
/
1 ,0
i o!
X
I x l IflZ 0, u
/)
a
"'4-
e. Move the X-axis to reference point by means of handle.
HANDLE
Jr
00 /
/
i
30
m
a
9s
J)
A CAUTION
1. Perform only in X-axis.
2. Place Z-axis at a distance from reference point.
V -14 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-Kin mncHinE
f. This time, move the current position
“EXTERNAL” coordinatie to be 380.000
(SKT 15LMS) and 314.000(SKT 21LMS),
set the coordinate X at “0” and then move it
about 1/2(12,000) of ball screw pitch in the
opposite direction from Reference Point
Return.
g. Move the reference point return dog to the
position where the reference point reduction
Fig. 5-4 Reference Point Return Dog
signal is turned ON. Movement
h. Reference point return the X-axis.
<o> gOT
EH (iaan,
RAP®
-X O
i. Using the handle, confirm the distance from reference point to reduction signal OFF is
within the limits. If being out of the limits, readjust the dog.
j. Perform para. 2 and 3 again and write the differences between “MACHINE” coordinate
value and 380.000(SKT15LMS)/314.000(SKT21LMS) at parameter No #1240 as 1/2 of the
running distance.
k. Turn off and then re-apply the power.
A CAUTION
If para k has not been performed, it will not be operated properly.
V -15 -
HYUfiDHi-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3) X-axis Dog and Limit Switch Attatched Position
mm (in)
P = 24 grid (in diameter)
- OT Dog
2 Reference Point Dog

(0.08)
A A
Reference Point
440 Limit Switch
(17.32) B c
\ +OT Dog
2
(0.08) -OT C
+ OT Limit Switch
Limit Switch
Fig. 5-5 X-axis Dog and Limit Switch Attached Position
V -16 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDRi-Kin mncHinE
4) Z-axis
mm(in)
Standard
Soft Jaw
"53? c
Qj
Tail Stock
Paper
o
0.
A
B
C
32
©/
Table. 5-1 Chuck Dimensions mm (in)

Section A B C
SUPER KIA SAMWOO Chuck 91(3.58) 29(1.14) 405(15.94)
TURN 15L HWACHEON Chuck 90(3.54) 32(1.26) 403(15.87)
SUPER KIA SAMWOO Chuck 103(4.06) 39(1.54) 408(16.06)
TURN 21L HWACHEON Chuck 102(4.02) 44(1.73) 404(15.9)
A CAUTION
For SUPER KIATURN 15L/21L, the reference point of Z-axis is different in
diameter as shown in the above table, so adjust it after checking the specification
of Chuck.
V -17 -
HYurmni-Kin mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
a. To approach the outer diameter bite tool to chuck and protect the blade end, use a thin
piece of paper, feed the handle and approach the tip end of bite tool to the jaw section
until the paper is not moved.
Q)
CZZ3 HANDLE CZZ3
00
[S ] [S
/
i
— <r
'o,
0 Q.
/)
b. Set the “EXTERNAL” coordinate “Z” to “0” (see X-axis).
c. Set the mode to Handle X, move the turret head in the + direction of X-axis, and make
it not to be interfered with Tail Stock.
HANDLE CZZD
00 /
/
i
30
is
0.
J
-Ml
d. Using the handle, determine the position

—
nr. I HANDLE
at reference point.
00 lii | fi
/
1
I X | Uz
0,
J)
V -18 -
A CAUTION
1. Perform only in Z-axis.
2. Position X-axis at a distance from reference point.
e. This time, set “EXTERNAL” coordinate to “0” and then move it about 1/2(6.000) of ball
screw pitch in the opposite direction to Reference Point Return.
f. Move the reference point return dog to the position where reference point reduction signal
is turned ON.
g. Reference point return the Z-axis.
+x
See
ns an.
RAPID
El
-X <0 V
h. Using the handle, confirm the distance from reference point to reduction signal OFF is
within the specified range. If out of the specified, readjust the dog.
i. Perform para, b and c again and write the differences “MACHINE” coordinate value at
parameter 5V& 1850 as the grid shift amount.
j. Turn off and then re-apply the power.
A CAUTION
If the para, j being not performed, it will not be operated properly.
V -19 -
HYunnm-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
1-3-3. Z-axis Dog and Limit Switch Attached Position
+OT Limit Switch
Reference Point
,ca
Limit Switch
-OT Limit Switch
nt -OT dog
Reference
Point Dog
+OT Dog
/**ÿ---**
T\ 0P-
im/ess-
/
‘!®SsaSSS*»/‘m
/
/
/
/
K..
Fig. 5-6 Z-axis Dog and Limit Switch Attached Position
V -20 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYuncmi-Kin mRCHinE
1-4. X- and Z-axes Backlash Adjusting Method
1) Delete the compensation entered.
a. Select the setting screen and make the parameter change valid..
b. Select the parameter screen and delete the backlash compensation.
2) Measuring Backlash
a. Fit the dial indicator to the turret from Tail Stock or Sub-spindle side.
b. Measure the backlash using X- or Z-axis handle (See the following Fig.)
(a)
y
'
+
B.
© MX Dial indicator u,
0.003 mm
Turn the handle to the left and set

the Handle Indicator mode to ”0”.
(b)
Turn again the handle to
the right of 20 ~ 30° .
& 30
(c) Backlash in Z
O,
Turn the handle to the right and

L® V0;
Backlash in X set the pointer to “0”. This time,
the difference of indicator becomes
the backlash.
V -21 -
HYunnni-KiH mncHiriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3) Setting Sequence of Backlash

a. Display the parameter screen as in above 1).
b. Confirm the cursor is positioned at no. of the axis to be compensated, key in the
compensated value and then press INSERT key.
Ex. 1) X-axis backlash compensation

If 0.012 of backlash is compensated,
_ _
Compensation — Backlash Value
Compensated unit (0.0005)
0.012
0.0005 = 24mm
Ex. 2) Z-axis backlash compensation

If 0.015 of backlash is compensated,
_
Backlash Value
= 0.015
= 0.001 =
Compensation 15mm
Compensated unit (0.001)
In the above method, input the specific backlash value.
c. Turn OFF and then re-apply the power.
A CAUTION
If para, c being not performed, it is impossible to operate properly.
4) Checking Backlash
Check the setting value is proper in the method of 2).
V -22 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUnDRI-KIH mRCHinE
1-5. Q-Setter Position Adjustment
After the machine collided or repaired, check the position of Q-setter is misaligned.
A CAUTION
If the Q-setter used with misaligned, it requires the compensation as being
misaligned.
1) Check the distance parameter to the position of sensor.
Reference Point
i
|#5016|
H #5018|- -
-fl ]
h
#5015|
I
-| #5017 [
Set “PARAMETER WRITE" to “1” | |

SYSTEM Key in “5015” Search
Press "system” and
#5015 [ ] For the inside of X-axis.

#5016 [ ] For the outside of X-axis.
#5017 [ ] For the opposite direction of Z-axis.
#5018 [ ] For Z-axis.
V -23 -
HYunoni-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2) Check the offset of tool to be used in measuring.

l: Outside Tool [of] X [ Z
2: Inside Tool | 02 | X Q Z
3) Measure the compensation according to Q-setter.
a. Check the reference point return lamp is illuminated.

If not illuminated, perform the reference point return manually.
b. Set the mode to manual (JOG, handle feed) and pull out the Q-setter to the position to
be measured.
] HANDLE [ ]
/
H UA
B C
:
IS) IS)
fi#() // /
(_JQG -7/
X z l: /
n j)
x
c. Call the tool to be used in measuring.
1=1 TURRET 1=1

SELECT
_
o o-
m
h
V -24 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmm-KiR mncwnE
d. Approach the tool nose to Q-setter. If contacted to the sensor in the manual mode, the
tool offset will be input automatically.
01
om IB-
4) Calculate new parameter to the position of center.

New parameter = old parameter + (new offset - old offset) X 1000
para. 1) para. 3) para. 2) para. 5)

New #5015
New #5016
-
= [
[ ] + ([
] + ([
]) x 1000
]) x 1000
= [
= [
New #5017 = [ ] + ([ ]) x 1000 = [
New #5018 - [ ] + ([ ]) x 1000 =[
5) Set the parameter at #5015.
g
Press “SETTING” Key
-ÿ “PARAMETER WRITE"
m [iNSERlj
SYSTEM key in
the data
[iNSERlj
Press “SYSTEM” Key
V "25 -
HYunDRi-Kin mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
A CAUTION
After changing the data, always press the RESET key, turn off and then re¬
apply the power.
6) Adjusting Method according to Cutting.[ (fine adjustment following data 5)]
a. Call the tool to be used in cutting. [=ÿ TURRET C=l

b. When the desired value is assumed at SELECT
o o-
50 mm by chucking the workpiece, cut
it with the work coordinate set to 50.0. m h
c. Measure the workpiece has been cut.
d. Calculate new parameter.
New parameter = (old parameter) + (measured value - desired value) x 1000
Ex. l: # 5016 = (-60482) + (49.8-50.0) x 1000 = (-60482) + (-200) =-60682
Ex. 2: # 5015 = (-140657) + (50.25-50.0) x 1000 = (-140657) +250 = -140407
2. General Check and Repair

2-1. General
1) General check and repair are essential to maintain the high integriy for a long time.
So, general check and repair take precedence of any other job.
A CAUTION
1. When doing the general check and repair, open the necessary cover or door
and the door of electric control panel remains closed.
2. Never use compressed air. It may result in penetration of foreign matters
into the spindle bearing and guide-way.
A WARNING
Prior to performing the general check and repair, place the main break switch
of electric control panel to OFF as shown in Fig. 5-7.
V -26 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYuriDRi-Kin mncHinE
O ©
tasil
!°t
CD
tJ B
!
Fig. 5-7 Main Break Switch OFF Position
2) Always record the operation and check/repairing works.

Recording and Maintaining the operation is necessary for the operation of machine. Record
the check and repairing works independently from the operation.
3) Check and repair will be performed in short time. This short-term work is important to
avoid the unexpected accident or problem. And it is one of the important works to use
the machine effectively for a long time.
4) Oiling
4 WARNING
If the recommended oil didn’t supplied, it may occur damage in the machine.
This machine has many places to be lubricated. When lubricating, “Avoid over-filling* is
important. When oiling, follow this manual.
5) Check and repair can be performed daily, weekly, monthly and yearly. Check, fill oil and
clean the machine as instructed in this manual.
V -27 -
HYurmm-Kin mncHiriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Note: o Checking Period,
2-2. Check and Repair Items
• CRT display
Checking and Repairing period
Period
Reference
Item Daily Six- Yearly Biennially
Weekly Monthly monthly
1. Remove chips inside the o 2-3-1

machine
2. Remove chips above the o 2-3-1
_
tool post
3. Remove chips above the o 2-3-1
tail stock
4. Remove chips from each O 2-3-1
slider cover
O 3-6-3
5. Clean coolant nozzle (if dogged)
6. Treatment of chip o 2-3-1

7. Clean coolant tank O 3-6-2
8. Coolant filter O 3-6-2
9. Check the hydraulic oil flow o 2-3-3
10. Check the lubricating flow 2-3-3
11. Check the coolant flow O 2-3-3
12. Hydraulic oil pressure o 2-3-4
35 kgf/rai
13. Check the lubricating 3-5-1
oil supply
14. Check the coolant supply O 3-6-1
15. Hydraulic oil strainer O 3-4-2
16. Lubricating pump filter O 3-5-2
17. Clean around the machine o 2-3-1
18. Oil leakage o 2-3-3
19. Remove the tool chip and o 2-4-2
check if damaged and broken
20. Loosen bolt o
21. Turret tool sank o 2-4-2
22. Check Operating Panel o
23. Clean the Electric Panel o
24. Operation of emergency o
stop switch
25. Vibration, noise and o
increased temperature
26. Check the operation of
safety device
27. Check the tension of spindle (o)
one month
o 2-6-2
belt after installation
V -28 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDHi-Kin mncHinE
Note: o Checking Period
Check and Repair Items(Continued) _•CRT display
Checking and Repairing period
Period
Reference
Item Daily Six- Yearly Biennially
Weekly Monthly monthly
28. Check the multi cover o 2-6-2

of X-axis
29. Operation of the wiper in o 2-6-2
X-and Z-axes
30. Clean inside of the coolant o 3-6-2
tank and change oil
31. Moving hose O 2-6-1
32. Clean the halogen lamp o 2-7-1
33. Relay in the Electric Box o
34. Machine level o
35. Check backlash o 1-4
36. Clean the fan o 2-5-3
37. Clean the front cover of O 3-1-2
spindle
38. Applying chuck grease o 2-3-1
2-3. Daily Check and Repair
2-3-1. Inside of the Machine
A DANGER
Before cleaning inside of the machine, always turn OFF the power.
A CAUTION
Never use compressed air. It may result in the machine failure.
a. Use the tool such as brush, damp cloth, etc.

b. Remove chips and collect them in the chip box of machine.
V -29 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
A CAUTION
1. First, pull the collected chips out of the machine and collect them into the
chip box.
2. Using coolant, clean the inside of machine.
3. If chips not removed, it may cause a failure of the machine.
c. Inject the grease into the Chuck and

clean it.
grease.
Use the specified grease.
rol
'ora -I
m
w
Fig. 5-8 Checking the inside of Machine
V -30 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunoHi-KiR mncHinE
2-3-2. Outside of the Machine
1) Remove the collected chips into the separated chip box.
WARNING
If there are coolant, grease or water on the floor, immediately wipe it out
using damp clothes or papers. Otherwise, it can cause personal injury from
slipping.
Used tool: shovel, brush
A. If the machine hasn’t equipped with chip conveyor

a. Remove chips from the front of the machine
Pull out the coolant tank in front of the machine, pick out chips from the chip
box in coolant tank and put them into a separate container and return its original
position.
CD
CD !ÿ[
((((
Fig. 5-9 Removing chips from the chip box
V -31 -
HYunDHi-KiR mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
B. If the machine equipped with chip conveyor

Position the chip box just under the chip conveyor and remove the collected chips.
Chip conveyor
o
o° &
0°
Fig. 5-10 Removing Chips out of the Chip Box
2-3-3. Checking Oil Flow

Oil flow can be checked by means of flow level gage in the tank. If filling oil, use the
recommended oil.
1) Check the flow of hydraulic oil
2) Check the flow of lubricating oil
3) Check the flow of coolant
5W
m i*5i Coolant
V Lubricating Oil
Hydraulic Oil
Fig. 5-11 Checking Oil Flow
V -32 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-KiR mncmnE
2-3-4. Checking Pressure
Check the pressures in Hydraulic unit, Chuck, Sub-chuck and Tail Stock.
1) Hydraulic unit: 35 kgf/cri(3.5 MPa)
2) Chuck: 5-27 kgf/dl(0.5~2.7 MPa)
3) Sub Chuck: 1-20 kgf/ai(0.1~2 MPa)
4) Tail Stock: 1~20 kgf/cri (0.1-2 MPa)
A WARNING
If being set above the specified pressure, it can cause machine failure.
Tail Stock Pressure
Sub-chuck Pressure
0
Chuck Pressure
Hydraulic Unit Gage
Fig. 5-12 Checking Pressure
V -33 -
HYUnDHI-KIH mnCHIHE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2-3-5. Filling and Changing Oil
A CAUTION
# If using soluble coolant
1. Choose it in consideration of its characteristics such as rustproof, security,
cooling, and etc.
2. It shoud not include the contents dangerous to human body.
3. It should not be deteriorated during the storage.
4. It should not include corrosive or risk elements to the painting.
5. It should not include elements melting to rubber products used in the machine.
6. It should not include the contents which may degrade machine accuracy.
7. Add a little rustproof oil when mixing coolant with soluble coolant.
Otherwise, it may be rusted as coolant dried.
8. When completing work, wipe out the part contacted with coolant. Apply it
with rustproof oil after cleaning.
9. Take care not to touch coolant with skin. Be sure you should be informed of
its user’s instruction for your health.
10. The mixing method of soluble coolant with water depends on the kinds of
coolant and follow the instructions of the manufacturer.
A WARNING
Make sure the problem occurred by coolant, and etc. is not warranted.
1) Filling Oil (if necessary)
A CAUTION
If there is coolant, grease, or water on the floor, immediately wipe it out with
damp clothes or papers. Otherwise, it may cause personal injury.
V -34 -
A. Filling coolant is possible in front or rear of the machine, but generally supplied at the
rear.
a. Oiling in the front box of the machine
Pull out the coolant tank and fill it.
EE)
IIIIIII
/ — EE) illiiil
I OOO
! ooo
CD
m !ÿ
/V
0 r f
JLK
Fig. 5-13 Oiling in front of the machine
b. Oiling in the rear of machine

Disassemble the cover at the rear of machine, remove multi-hole iron plate from the
sub tank, and then fill coolant.
Fig. 5-14 Oiling at the rear of machine.
A WARNING
1. Never touch coolant with bare hands.
2. Coolant may damage the skin seriously.
V -35 -
HYurmm-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2-3-6. Around the Machine

1) Clean the outside of machine.
Wipe out oil and remove coolant, chip, and etc.
Clean CRT screen and operating panel with soft clothes dampened in cleaning solution.
2) Check there is an evidence of oil leakage outside of the machine.
3) Check if chips are removed, broken or damaged from the tool (insert),
2-4. Weekly Check and Repair
2-4-1. Inside of the machine
1) Cleaning the filter of coolant tank.
A WARNING
When using compressed air, always wear protective goggles.
a. Use brush and air gun.

b. Remove the filter and clean it with brush.
41 r
Fig. 5-15 Cleaning the Filter of Coolant Tank
A CAUTION
The use of air gun in the vicinity of the machine may cause the machine
failure.
V -36 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDRi-Kin mRCHiriE
1) Turret Tool Holder and Shank
Check the chips are removed from the tool holder or shank and engaging bolt is
attached.
s
A 0
a
Fig. 5-16 Turret Tool Holder and Shank
2) Engaged State of Bolt
A WARNING
1. This check is for preventing a failure in advance.
2. If neglecting this, it may cause the machine failure.
3) Check the Operating Panel is illuminated.
-'View Lamp (Optional)
"Main Operating Panel
Fig. 5-17 Operating Position
V -37 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2-5. Monthly Check and Repair
2-5-1. Inside of the Machine

1) Cleaning the nozzle of coolant
Used tool: - and + screwdrivers
Remove chips around the coolant nozzle attached at turret.
*
£ a > a
©
k
Fig. 5-18 Removing Turret Nozzle Chip
jp
.cHVC. . mm'ÿ•---.-.-..J i - JNjjC
"...
//
&
->.i
. ... 7/
Wv7
Fig. 5-19 Coolant Supplying Route
V -38 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUnDRI-KIR mHCHinE
1) Filling lubricating oil
WARNING
When filling lubricating oil, always use the recommended oil by KIA.
Otherwise, it may cause the machine failure.
a. Tank capacity:
- 1.8 l (0.47 gal)
b. Lubricating oil supply:

- 33cc/h
Recommended oil:
See chap. 3-5-2 “Place to
Cl'
be Lubricated”.
Lubricating Oil
Filling Position
Fig. 5-20 Lubricating Oil Filling Position
«*»
s
mm. Oil Level Gage
Oil Filter Plug
Fig. 5-21 Filling Lubricating oil
- V -39 -
HYunnni-Kin mncmnE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
c. Open the plug of oil filter.

d. Fill the recommended lubricating oil up to the upper limit of level gage.
e. Plug the oil filter.
A WARNING
When fillling lubricating oil, wipe out dropped oil on the floor with damp
clothes or papers. Otherwise, it may cause personal injury.
2) Whenever filling lubricating oil, always clean the waste oil tank.
SI
l
m
7
c> C>
Fig. 5-22 Cleaning Waste Oil Tank.
A WARNING
Unless the waste oil tank cleaned, it may cause personal injury due to
overflown oil.
- V -40 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmm-KiR mncmnE
1) Cleaning Cooling Fan
• Used tool: Wrench (3, 4, and 5 mm), damp clothes
A WARNING
Before cleaning the fan, turn OFF the Main Power switch. Otherwise, it may
cause personal injury.
• Remove the door from the

Electric Control Panel and
the fan filter from the left
side and then clean them
{&= = =
using air gun.
2-6. Six-monthly Check and Repair

1) Exchanging Hydraulic Oil
A WARNING
1. Before exchanging the hydraulic oil, always turn OFF the power.
2. When filling hydraulic oil, always use the recommended one by KIA.
Otherwise, it may cause the machine failure.
- V -41 -
HYunom-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
The hydraulic oil should be changed after the first 3 months of installation.
Thereafter, change it every 6 months.
Used tool: Wrench (5 and 10 mm)

Oil capacity: 15 l (3.92 gal)
a. Turn OFF the main power switch in the electric control panel at the rear of
machine.
b. Disassemble the bolt in the left lower cover and place the collection container
under the drain plug installed at the rear of hydraulic unit.
c. Loosen the drain plug and collect hydraulic oil.
<st>
-v
m.
Fig. 5-23 Collecting Oil of Hydraulic Unit
V -42 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunnm-Kin mncmnE
d. When completed, close the drain
plug.
\
e. Open the door for repairing in
front of the machine and the oil #/
filter cap and then supply the
hydraulic oil.
Fig. 5-24 Supplying Hydraulic Oil
2) Changing Coolant
Clean chips in coolant tank and perform in the following orders.
A WARNING
When changing coolant, wipe out dropped oil on the floor with damp clothes
or papers. Otherwise, it may cause personal injury.
Used tools: Coolant collecting box, damp clothes, shovel, wrench (17 mm),
+ screwdriver, coolant capacity 185 l (48.9 gal)
a. Disconnect hoses using + screwdriver.

b. Remove the tank.
0
ooo
CD OOP
CD
Df
Fig. 5-25 Coolant Tank
- V -43 -
HYunDHi-Kifl mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
c. Position coolant collecting box under

the drain plug in tank, loosen the
plug and allow all coolant to drain.
K>
Fig. 5-26 Collecting Coolant
d. Clean inside of the coolant tank

thoroughly.
4s>
e. Clean the filter.
f. Slide coolant tank into the bed.

I'D
&
g. Supply new coolant.
Fig. 5-27 Supplying Coolant
3) Checking Moving Hose
A DANGER
Always turn OFF the power and then check moving hoses for damage.
Otherwise, it may cause personal injury.
V -44 -
a. Disassemble the cover at
the rear of machine and
check hoses for damage in
the Z-axis direction and
two hoses in the X-axis
direction.
b. Attach the cover.

0
Fig. 5-28 Checking Moving Hose
4) Cleaning Front Cover of Spindle

For detailed information, see chap. 3-1-2 “Cleaning Front Cover of Spindle”.

1) Checking the Operation of safety device
Check the limit switch and dog installed on the door for operation.
•'o'
Limit Switch
Dog
Pi x Applicable only to the C.E.
Fig. 5-29 Door Interlock
WARNING
Never change the positions of limit switch and dog installed on the door.
Also, using this without operating may cause personal severe injury.
V -45 -
HYunnm-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2) Adjustment of Belt Tension

a. Adjusting the tension of spindle belt.
The spindle belt should be checked after the first one month of installation. Thereafter,
check it every 6 months.
1
Set screw
Bracket L-'
ail
O
o eÿ
<!
ce
Fig. 5-30 Spindle Belt Tension
Table 5-2. Belt Tension
Model Belt Displacement Load
SUPER KIATURN 15L 10.8 mm (0.43 in.) 15.4 kgf(154 N)

SUPER KIATURN 21L 10.9 mm (0.43 in.) 17 kgf(170 N)
Used tool: wrench (6 mm and 12 mm)
b. Unscrew bolts, turn setscrews under bracket and then adjust the tension.
c. After adjustment of tension, secure bolts and engage the above set screws.
A CAUTION
When adjusting the belt tention, tighten both of setscrews in bracket equally
to allow the bracket to move horizontally.
V -46 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDRi-Kifl mncmriE
3) Adjustment of position coder timing belt tention
The timing belt should be checked the after first one month of installation. Thereafter,
check it every 6 months.
Bolt.
O
V
A
% O
%Of !G
Fig. 5-31 SUPER KIATURN 15L Timing Belt Tension
Unscrew the bolt, adjust the tension as in Table 5-3, and engage it again.
Bolt.
o v
A
4
% o
Of
Fig. 5-32 SUPER KIATURN 21L Timing Belt Tension
Unscrew the bolt, adjust the tension as in Table 5-3, and engage it again.
Table 5-3. Timing Belt Tension
Model Belt Displacement Load
SUPER KIATURN 15L 2.8 mm(0.11 in.) 0.4 kgf(4 N)

SUPER KIATURN 21L 3.1 mm(0.12 in.) 0.4 kgf(4 N)
Used tool: wrench (10 mm)
V -47 -
HYuncmi-Kin mflcmnE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
4) Checking and Changing Wiper
A DANGER
Always turn OFF the power before repairing the machine. Otherwise, it may
cause personal severe injury.
Check the wiper for operation and if damaged or broken, exchange it with reference to
the following diagram.
F K ABODE
p-'j- 1676-70-203-1
s-i 0 L F
A
~*ÿ1 676-70-31 8-1
B M
GH
C "ÿÿ1 676-70-31 9-1
•L.
c irIk : XI
N
IJKLM
T\ f
'4. I C fe* o
1676-70-204-1
\l
D' NOPQ
* G
'll is Q
P
1676-70-202-1
Fig. 5-33 Wiper Location Diagram
- V -48 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunoHi-Kin mncHinE
5) Checking and Exchanging X-axis Multicover
A DANGER
Always turn OFF the power before repairing the machine. Otherwise, it may
cause personal severe injury.
Used tools: wrench (5 mm) and brush
a. Check the multicover for operation in the manual feed of X-axis.
b. Raise the stainless plate of multicover, check the inside neoprensheet for damage and
then remove chips.
a V/”
m0
(5
S)
it)
$5 ©
,o
Fig. 5-34 X-axis Multicover
V -49 -
HYunnni-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2-7. Yearly Check and Repair

1) Work light
Follow the orders as below when cleaning a glass of work light or changing a bulb.
A WARNING
When exchanging a bulb, always turn OFF the power. Otherwise, it may
A CAUTION
1. When exchanging a bulb, always wear clean gloves. Otherwise, this can
result in contamination on the bulb and affect on its brightness.
2. Never grasp a bulb with bare hands.
Used tools: wrench (5 mm), damp clothes
® Unscrew bolts and disassemble the front cover.

(2) Remove a bulb by hands and insert new one.
(3) Reassemble the front cover.
ON
Fig. 5-35 Changing a Bulb of Work Light
V -50 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunoni-Kifl mncmnE
2) Checking and Repairing Levelling bolt
Used tool: spanner (24 mm)
a. Check the levelling bolt and nut for looseness.

b. For the adjustment of level, see chapter 4 ‘Transport and Installation’.
It 3? .
&
Fig. 5-36 Checking Levelling Bolt
3) Adjustment of Backlash in Each Axis

See para. 1-4 “Adjustment of backlash in X- and Z-axes”.
2-8. Check and Repair Before Long-term Storage

Check and repair if the machine is stopped for more than 2 weeks as follows:
(1) Apply rust-proof oil.

(2) Remove coolant.
(3) Save the NC data.
1) Rust -proof
A DANGER
Before applying rust-proof oil, turn OFF the main power of machine.
Otherwise, it may cause personal injury.
V -51 -
During the long-term storage of machine, always apply the following units and parts
with rust-proof oil.
® Vertical Motion Bearing (X- and Z-axes)

(D Ballscrew(X- and Z-axes)
(D Slider cover (X- and Z-axes)
© Turret head
(D Work light
2) Collect coolant
Remove coolant in the main and the sub coolant tanks. For detailed information, see
the desired one of para. 2-6-1 “Filling and Changing oil”.
3) Save the NC data
Save the NC data in PC.
2-9. Check and Repair Before Operation Since Long-term Storage

Check and Repair before operation since long-term storage as follows:
(1) Remove rust-proof oil.

(2) Supply coolant.
(3) Perform general checks prior to operation.
(4) Check for oil leakage.
(5) Idling.
(6) Check a noise, vibration and the abnormal high temperature, etc.
1) Cleaning rust-proof oil

Clean all unit parts free from rust-proof oil applied in para. 2-8 “Check and Repair
Before long-term Storage”. Use damp clothes and cleaning solutions.
2) Supplying coolant
For detailed information, see para. 2) of 2-6-1 “Filling and changing oil”.
3) General Checks
For detailed information, see para. 2-2 “Check and Repair Items”
4) Checking for oil leakage

Check there is an evidence of oil leakage inside of the machine or hoses.
V -52 -
5) Warm up of Machine
A. Warm up of Spindle
Before operating since stopped for a long time, idle the machine in the following orders.
a. Clamp the rotation speed of spindle

to 1000 rpm for a safety.
0
b. Rotate the spindle with 500 rpm for OR’
half an hour.
c. Rotate the spindle with 1,000 rpm 0,

0/W-.
for half an hour.
d. Stop the spindle.
A WARNING
If rotating the spindle in a high speed suddenly since stopped for a long time,
it may result in a failure of the spindle bearing or chuck cylinder.
B. Warm up each axis(X- and Z-axes) and B-axis(Tail Stock)

Idle X- and Z-axes and B-axis(Tail Stock) for half an hour before operation since
stopped for a long time.
Fig. 5-37 Warm up Each Axis and B-axis(Tail Stock)
V -53 -
3. Maintenance of Major Units

3-1. Spindle
3-1-1. Adjustment of Degree in Spindle

If the spindle changed its position or disassembled for maintenance, adjust as
follows :
mm(in)
B
Pad mounting bolt 250 Position
(1C) (10)
0 Position
A
a*
Q>
! Spindle Bolt
L i
Calculation formula :
(a)
0,030X250(0.0012X10)
g 0Q30
250(10) (measured length) (0.0012)
Fig. 5-38 Adjustment of Spindle Accuracy
Used tools: spanner (24 mm), dial gage (0.002 mm)

Material: £50x250( s*2xl0) aluminium or cast-iron
1) Loosen spindle bolt and disassemble into the bolt of A and B pads. Re-assemble A
and B pads and engage spindle bolt.
2) Chuck the material for testing [length: 250 mm (10 in.)].
3) Cut the material for testing(fine cut).
4) Measure the roundness of workpiece (For example).
If the difference [overhall length of 250 mm (10 in.)] of roundness is 0.015
mm (0.0006 in.), the current sum of pad will be 0.030 mm (0.0012 in.) by the above
calculation formula:
a. If the configuration of manufacturing material is , polish the grinded

surface (attached to head stock) of A pad as 0.030 mm(0.0012 in.).
b. If the configuration of manufacturing material is polish the grinded
surface (attached to head stock) of B pad as 0.030 mm(0.0012 in.).
V -54 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUflDHI-KIH mnCHIHE
5) To grind the resistive pad, disassemble bolts for engaging pad.
6) After grinding the pad, loosen bolts for engaging head stock and engage the pads.
7) Engage bolts for engaging head stock.
8) Fine cut the material for testing.
Adjust the difference of roundness to be less than 0.015 mm(0.0006 in.).

9) Repeat between 2) and 8) until the roundness reaches to the desired value.
3-1-2. Cleaning Front Cover of Spindle
A DANGER
Turn OFF the power when entering the machine for cleaning the front cover
of spindle. Otherwise, it may cause personal injury.
Clean the drain hole located under the front cover of spindle to prevent from being
clogged. Clean the drain hole, using a wire.
Used tool : 4> 3 wire
"\
Fig. 5-39 Cleaning Front Cover of Spindle
A CAUTION
Never use compressed air. It may cause machine failure.
V -55 -
HYunoni-Kifl mmiHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-2. X- and Z-axes

3-2-1. X- and Z-axes Constructions
X-axis servo motor
Torque Limiter
.Torque Limiter X-axis ball screw
;>
o
Z-axis Servo Motor o*o_ SO
Cross Slide
Z-axis Ball Screw
Saddle
Fig. 5-40 X- and Z-axes Constructions
1) X- and Z-axes are driven by ball screws and AC servo motors.

2) The positions of X- and Z-axes are verified by the encoder installed in AC servo motor.
3) X- and Z-axes servo control units are located in the Electrical Box.
3-2-2. Restoring Torque Limiter

1) Check of Torque Limit separation.
The alarm lamp will be illuminated
on the Operating Panel and the PROGRAM
machine be in Emergency Stop state. STOP ALARM
If pressing <ALM> key on the NC m
Operating Panel, the alarm message
will be displayed on CRT screen.
°> ?
V -56 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUnDRI-KIR mRCHinE
ALARM MESSAGE 01 234N 12345
JMES AGEJ 506 OVER TRAVEL : +X

2013 TURRET COMPULSORY UNCLAMP
n
OS 100 % L 0%
Press -MASSAGNF key JOG 13:33:10
[ALARM] [MSG] [ HISTRY ] [ ] [ I
I F X-AXIS, AL-506 X-AXIS TORQUE AU\RM
2) Restoring Torque Limit
HANDLEI -]
00 EJ
-I-
/ \ CD
/
/
9
X z STANDBY
INCREMENTS §
000
9
Turn the handle slowly

Select the handle and the
increment “10" of collided axis.
MESSAGE HISTORY 01234N12345 [ POWER!

93/04/01 17:25:00 Page : 1
No.'
El *ÿ
o
o ZERO
RETURN
Reference Point
MEM STRT MTN FIN ALM 17:25:00 Return
[ALARM] [MSG] [HISORYJ [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
A CAUTION
If the torque limit has been separated, the reference point of machine may be
changed. Therefore, turn off and then reapply the power, finally perform
reference point return.
V -57 -
HYunDHi-KiH rrmcHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3) Adjustment of Detected Range

mm(in)
Adjust the proximity switch from ON

to OFF position in the range between
0.7—1(0.028—0.039)
Clearance m
o
/
0
Stroke
1.7(0.067) n
0.7(0.028)
3-3. Tool Post

3-3-1. Tool Post Construction
Servo motor
0
'0
\ Cylinder
Dog
W.
a
Clamp Limit Switch
Unclamp Limit Switch
Fig. 5-41 Tool Post Construction
V -58 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmm-Kin mncmnE
3-3-2. Tool Post Home Position Setting (MITSUBISHI)
1) Period of Home Position Setting
Because the absolute position detector is used as the position detection system of tool
post servo, the home position setting of Tool Post should be performed in the following
cases. If indexing the tool post without home position setting, alarm No., “A90” will be
displayed on the servo amp.
® If have disassembled or reassembled the servo motor

© If exchanging the servo amp
(3) If exchanging the battery
® If disconnecting the detector connector of servo motor
(D If the absolute position data has been missed by other causes.
2) Home Position Setting Method
SPINDLE
a. Unclamp the turret by
| SELECT 1 I (if n P REV | |T0P |
simultaneously pressing “rSpindle la>J=T FOR JOG
STOPj” and “rSELECT_,” on

the Operating Panel. The message,
“AL-2013 TURRET ALARM MESSAGE 01 234N12345
COMPULSORY UNCLAMP” will

506 OVER TRAVEL : +X
be displayed on the alarm screen.
OS 100 %L 0%
JOG 13:33:10
[ALARM] [MSG] [HISTRY] ] I
b. Press the Emergency Stop switch.
Emergency Stop
V -59 -
HYurmni-Kin mRCHiriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
c. Turn the turret by hand and set the No.

1 tool. Turn the turret and remain it on
the position where the arrows of turret
and tool post body are aligned. 8*
d. Release the Emergency Stop state and A

press the “STAND-BY” switch. H0
e. Press the “CALL/BZ OFF” switch.

CALL
The turret is clamped and “AL-2013” / BZ
OfF
disappears on the alarm screen.
i)
f. Verify that X1000.7 has been changed to

NO 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
“1” in the diagnostic screen.
X1000 “1”
ij
g. With the Emergency stop switch pressed,

press the Spindle “STOP”, Mode SPINDLE D
“SELECT”, and “FEED HOLD”

START
PROGRAM *>
FEED HOLD I FOB | [\JOG REV STOP
<$> <§) © ®
switches simultaneously.
/}
h. Reset the Emergency Stop switch.

Now the home position setting of tool post
is completed and turret index is enabled. sv 1
V -60
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUnDRI-KIR mRCHIflE
3-3-3. Adjustment and Exchange of Clamp, Unclamp and Limit Switches.
If clamp and unclamp operations are not satisfied or the limit switch is required to be
exchanged, adjust as follows:
A WARNING
Prior to implementing the actions, turn OFF the power. Otherwise, it may cause
personal severe injury.
Used tools: wrench (5 mm), spanner
1) Disassemble the cover.

2) Adjust the dog bolt.
3) If exchanging the limit switch, disassemble engaging bolts, replace and then engage
the limit switch (Adjust the dog bolt).
4) Attach the cover.
Cover
0 \
\
\\ /Dog
/
'0 / Bolt
% y.
Q t
Bolt
(/ci
07:
v
Clamp Limit Switch
Unclamp Limit Switch
Fig. 5-42 Adjustment and Change of Limit Switch
- V -61 -
HYunoni-Kiq mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-3-4. Restoration in Collision of Turret

If the turret is collided by crash, misoperation or program error while turning, correct it
in the following orders.
4 WARNING
If the power required, always install the safety guard and then work inside of
the machine. Otherwise, it may cause personal severe injury.
o
am
B riP
Fig. 5-43 Installation of Safety Guard in Repairing.
Used tools: dial gage (0.002 mm) drill

wrench(8 and 10 mm) <}> 10 reamer
1) Perform the Home Position Setting

of turret as shown in para. 3-3-2
“Turret Home Position Setting”. Pin
Plug
2) Install the dial gage on the surface 3
\
0m
No. 1 of turret and check the X- Bolt A
Plug
axis for flatness.
3) If the flatness of turret is more V
than 0.02 mm, disassemble the O ©
&o;
plug and pin in front of turret and
loosen the bolt properly.
4) Adjust the turret so far the
flatness is within 0.02 mm and
engage the bolt. Fig. 5-44 Repairing Turret
V -62 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDHi-KiR mncmriE
5) After engaged, check again for the flatness.
6) Engage the pin to be deviated as 90° from the position of pulled out.
7) Close the plug after pin works.
8) Check for the flatness.
If the turret has been collided during rotation

Verify 1) and 2) and if the flatness
is within the desired value, follow Motor
the instructions given below. Spare Gear f
a. Loosen the bolt and remove a Bolt
bundle of motor.
Retainer
b. Disassemble the gear engaged
with motor shaft and re¬
engage it not to be slided. ter
WA
Q,
Fig. 5-45 Repairing Turret

3-4. Hydraulic
3-4-1. Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
TOOL POST
MAIN
CHUCK YV78B C-AXIS
YV1B YV7B
1
H I-
YV6A
--
YV78A
o YV1A
I > I
IIP
TlV
— B2 A2 B3 A3
V -63 -
HYuriDHi-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
SUB CHUCK
YV37B
H
U:
0 W37A
Ji?
sss When sub-spindle.

B1 A2
Fig. 5-46 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
3-4-2. Repairing Hydraulic Tank

If there is an abnormal noise or high temperature
in the hydraulic tank, check, repair and replace
the pump and motor, if necessary.
i./j
1) Turn OFF the power

2) Disassemble the bolt installed in the pump. &
3) Disassemble the bolt connecting the motor
with pump.
4) Disconnect the pump from motor. *
i S
5) Apply the power and check the motor for
rotation sound. ej
6) If the rotation sound of motor is high, change
the motor. &
7) If the motor is normal, change the pump.
Fig. 5-47 Hydraulic Tank
Disassembly Diagram
A CAUTION
Before applying the power since the pump has been changed, fill through filler
hole installed on the pump with hydraulic oil. Otherwise, it may cause the
pump burnout.
V -64 -
o
\
is?<
Fig. 5-48 Oiling After Changing Pump
2
1
12 10
o\ 8
6
o o\
13
* o,
W 9
m a
5
4
(9> 7
3 11
Fig. 5-49 Hydraulic Tank
V -65 -
HYurmm-Kin mmiHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Table 5-4. Hydraulic Tank Parts List
No. Nomenclature Qty. Type Remark
1 Motor 1 0.75 kw(l Hp) x4P NACHI

2 Vane pump 1 UVN-1A-0A2-10 NACHI
3 Oil Tank 1 15 liter (3.92 gal)
4 Oil Level Gage 1 M10X76L
5 Air Breather 1 AB-1380
6 T-check valve 1 CT-T03-0-4044A
7 Strainer 1
8 Pressure Gage 1 PT1/4 i*60 x 70 kgf/cri( i*2.36x7MPa)
9 Socket 3 PT3/8
10 Nipple 1 PT3/8 x PF1/4
11 Separator 1 40x25x10(1.57x1x0.39) mm(in)
12 Nipple 2
13 Nut 1 M8
3-4-3. Pressure And Flow Adjustment

The pressure and flow of hydraulic unit have been adjusted at factory and need not to
be done specially. However, for the hydraulic chuck or tail stock it requires to be
adjusted. If adjusting it, follow the instructions given below.
1) Adjustment of Main Pressure
) Increment
0ÿ1
a3*?
(i
Decrement
Fig. 5-50 Adjustment of Main Pressure
V -66 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE
Used tools: wrench (5 mm) and spanner (17 mm)
a. Loosen the nut using spanner.

b. If turning clockwise, the pressure is increased and if anticlockwise, it is decreased.
c. After adjusting, engage the nut using spanner.
4 WARNING
The main pressure is specified to 35kgf/cm * ( 3.5 MPa). If used over the
specified value, it may cause machine failure.
2) Adjusting the pressure of chuck and tail stock
Chuck Pressure Sub-Chuck

Gage Tail Stock Pressure Gage
Pressure Gage
% m
Chuck Pressure Tail Stock Pressure Sub-Chuck Pressure

Control Valve Control Valve
Control Valve
Fig. 5-51 Adjustment of Chuck and Tail Stock Pressure
If turning the pressure regulating valve knob clockwise, the pressure is increased and if
anticlockwise, it is decreased.
A WARNING
The pressures of chuck and tail stock are specified to 27 kgf/cm 2(2.7 MPa)
and that of sub chuck and tail stock to 20 kgf/cm2(2 MPa). If used over the
specified value, it may cause machine failure.
V -67 -
HYurmm-KiR mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-4-4. Repairing Manifold

A high level unit composed level the solenoid valve (direction converting valve),
hydraulic control valve, check valve, and etc..
To repair the damaged spool or poor spring, see the followings.
1) Manifold construction
'o)
pi
m
Fig. 5-52 Manifold Construction Diagram
!/'
sa
r i
<5k-
Fig. 5-53 Manifold Disassembly Diagram
V -68 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunoni-Kin mncmriE
2) Exchanging solenoid valve
In case of failures due to the broken internal spool or poor spring, disassemble, clean or
change the damaged solenoid valve in the following orders.
A CAUTION
After stopping operation, the solenoid will be hot and cause burns in
disassembled and exchanged. Turn off the power, cool sufficiently and then
replace it.
Plate
Screw
Terminal Box
Body
Spool
Cartridge
Coil
O-ring
Resin Nut
Fig. 5-54 Solenoid Valve Disassembly Diagram
Used tools: + screwdriver, wrench (4 mm)
V -69 -
HYunDHi-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
A. Exchanging solenoid coil

a. Loosen and disassemble resin nut from solenoid coil.
b. Disassemble the washer and O-ring.
c. Pull out the coil in the axis direction and disassemble it from the body. Reassemble it
in the reverse order.
A CAUTION
Torque the resin nut to 40—50 kgf • cm(4~ 5 N • m).
B. Disassembling and cleaning the solenoid valve

If the solenoid valve clogged with foreign matters, disassemble and clean the body as
follows :
a. Turn off the power.

b. Disconnect the coil.
c. Remove four bolts from the terminal box.
d. Disconnect the base plate.
e. Loosen and disconnect cartridge.
f. Disconnect internal parts from the body.
g. Pull out the spool from body without applying excessive power.
h. Clean body and each parts.
i. Check each parts such as O-ring and then reassemble them.
A CAUTION
1. When assembling the spool in the body of solenoid valve, never push it with
a force.
2. Make sure there are no foreign matters in the valve.
3. Torque the cartridge to 390—420 kgf •cm(39— 42 N • m).
j. Attach the base plate.
A CAUTION
Torque the plate to 5.5— 8.2 kgf • cm (0.55—0.82 N • m).
V -70 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUnDHI-KIH mflCHinE
k. Install the terminal box
1. Install the solenoid coil
m. Connect wires and turn ON the power
n. Check the hydraulic units for operation.
C. Exchanging the solenoid valve
A CAUTION
Solenoid valve is in the high temperature, therefore be careful not to be burned.
a. Turn OFF the power.

b. Remove four screws attached with the terminal box.
c. Disconnect wires.
d. Loosen the bolt securing valve.
A CAUTION
When disconnecting bolts, make sure the reduction valve, check valve, and etc.
are not disconnected.
e. Install new solenoid valve.

f. Torque the bolt to 40—50 kgf •cm(4~ 5 N • m).
A CAUTION
1. Make sure O-ring between each block is not disconnected.
2. Avoid overtorque. It may cause a failure.
g. Connect the wire of terminal box.

h. Apply the power.
i. Check for oil leakage.
j. Check the hydraulic units for operation.
V -71 -
HYUflDHI-KIH mRCHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-5. Lubrication Device

3-5-1. Place to be Lubricated
1) 4 places of bearing in the linear movement of X-axis.

2) 4 places of bearing in the linear movement of Z-axis.
3) 1 place of X-axis ballscrew and 2 places of support bearing.
4) 1 place of Z-axis ballscrew and 2 places of support bearing.
5) 2 places of tool post.
5
1
at
r--
rv
4
(M. m /%
25
%
——
3
'/ 4
50
2 e
L,S3te
V
—
/
/
Fig. 5-55 Place to be Lubricated
V -72 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunnni-Km mmzmriE
3-5-2. Cleaning Lubrication Unit
1) Construction
(10
2
0
O
1
b
— ®
4
0
9
8 7
Fig. 5-56 Lubrication Unit construction
Table 5-5. Lubrication Unit Parts List
No. Nomenclature Qty Model Remark
1 Oil cap 1
2 Shaft guide 1
3 Filter 1
4 Hose 1 5*6(0 0.024) mm(in)
5 Pressure switch 1
6 Oil tank 1 1800cc(0.47 gal)
7 Relief valve 1
8 Gear pump 1 See next page.
9 Float switch 1
10 Motor 1 15W(0.02 HP) 2P
V -73 -
HYunofli-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2) Using Lubrication Oil Pump and Motor
A. Pump
Item Specification
Discharge 100cc/min(0.02 gal/min) 50/60Hz
Maximum Discharge pressure 8 kgf/cm2(0.8MPa)

Voltage AC 110V(1*)
Frequency 50/60Hz
B. Motor
Item Specification
Power 15W(0.02HP)
Polarity 2P
Voltage 110V
Frequency 50/60Hz
Rated current 0.38A
Revolution number 3,000/3,600 rpm
C. Cleaning Lubrication Unit

Used tools: wrench (5 mm), + driver
a. Turn OFF the power.

b. Loosen bolts and disconnect the unit.
c. Disconnect the tank using + driver.
d. Clean the inside of tank.
e. Remove the filter from the suction port.
f. Clean the filter using kerosene.
g. Remove foreign matters from the filter using compressed air.
h. Mount the filter.
i. Mount the tank.
V -74 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-KiR mncmriE
j. Install the unit.
k. Supply lubricating oil.
1. Turn ON the power.
m. Check the wet moving part are being supplied with lubricating oil.
©
i@
I®
©
w, V >
Fig. 5-57 Cleaning Lubrication Pump
A WARNING
When cleaning the pump, remove oil dropped on the floor. Otherwise, it may
V -75 -
HYunom-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-5-3. Discharge of Lubricating Oil

1) Discharging cycle
Operation Stop Operation
Flow : 100cc/min(0.02gal/min)
10 sec. 40 min. 10 sec. Pressure: 8 kgf/ai(0.8MPa)
a. Discharging time is set to 10 seconds.

(TO = 10000)
b. Discharging cycle is set to once a 40 min.
(T2 = 2400000)
2) Adjustment of discharging period

To set the stop time to 40 min., perform as follows:
ra 4 [PMC] [ PMCPRM ]
Press “SYSTEM” key and

select the parameter screen
PMC POM #001 MONIT RUN
ADDRESS ADDRESS DAT/
Oil T20
0
012 T22
W T08 s s
-ÿ -ÿ C6 T10
H
06 T12
or T14
(TWER) |COUNTR ] JKEEPRLJ [DATA] |SETING ]
-f I 2*1 | 4 t| | 0 .|| 0 -| | Q.| | 0-1| Q.| |INPUT| t the setting time is

changed to 40 minute.
- V -76 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-Kin mncmriE
3-6. Coolant
3-6-1. Coolant Unit Construction
Coolant is pumped by the pump in coolant tank, injected through the nozzle and
used to cool and lubricate the workpiece.
A CAUTION
Coolant can be divided into water-soluble and water-unsoluble type, but it is
recommended to use water-soluble coolant because in case of being unsoluble,
it may cause major parts to be rusted.
/ y> \
! rjfy
>olf
-J.- Hose
LSSI(J mm
rismm&gi
V"
-- Pump
Tank
'*•«
Fig. 5-58 Coolant Unit Construction
V -77 -
HYuncmi-KiR mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-6-2. Specification and Cleaning
1) Specification
Table 5-6. Specification Table
Flooding sytle
Type
ACP-180F
Power (kW) 0.18(0.24HP) O
Polarity 3* • 2P
Voltage (V) 220 220/380
Permissible Maximum O
0.58 1.0 O
Current (A)
o
Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Ambient Temperature ( °C ) -15-40
Discharge 50Hz 75
Capacity
( l /min) 60Hz 90
Overall lift 50Hz 3

(m) 60Hz 3 Fig. 5-59 Pump
Available Density Limit (R") 1200/600
A CAUTION
The discharging amount of the above table is the flow on the discharge port
of pump when the back pressure is set to “0”. The discharging amount from
the actual nozzle is different depending on the size of nozzle, pipe resistance,
the height of nozzle and pump, and density of coolant.
2) Cleaning
Used tools: wrench(5, 6, 7mm), + driver, clothes, coolant collecting box
a. Stop discharging of coolant

b. Open the drain plug of tank and allow the residual oil to drain using drain hole.
c. Remove the cover plate above the tank.
d. Disconnect the filter of sub tank.
e. Clean the inside of the tank, cover plate and filter.
V -78 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-KiR mRcmriE
f. Fill coolant (135 l (35.25gal)) into tank
g. Assemble the tank in the reverse order of disassembly.
1;
<9
Fig. 5-60 Coolant Tank Disassembly Diagram
A CAUTION
When cleaning the coolant tank, remove oil dropped on the floor. Otherwise, it
may cause personal injury.
A CAUTION
When filling coolant, you should use the oil recommended by KIA. Otherwise,
it can cause machine failure.
A CAUTION
Remove the cover plate above the tank and sludge from the chip box regularly.
- V-79 -
HYUnDHI-KIH mHCHIflE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-6-3. Check and Repair

If there are vibration, noise, and abnormal discharging in coolant pump during daily
operation, immediately stop discharging of coolant and repair as a reference with the
following table.
A CAUTION
Before checking and repairing coolant, turn OFF the power. Otherwise, it may
Table 5-7. Checking and Repairing
Fault Possible Cause Remedy
Short circuit Repair or change

Trip thermal circuit break Analyze the cause after exchanging
Poor contact of switch Inspect contacts
Low voltage Contact the Electric Power Co.
Motor doesn’ t
Faulty motor Exchange
rotate
Foreign matters in the fan Disassemble and Repair
Wet moving part Disassemble and Repair
(damaged Liner Ring Bearing)
Rusted shaft Disassemble and Repair
Low rotation speed Check the rotation system
Motor rotates
Clogged pipe line Check and clean pipe
but coolant
Pump improperly flooded in coolant Fill coolant and clean tank
doesn’ t be
Fan not being flooded in coolant Open the air plug one time and
pumped. allow the ambient air to enter
Clogged fan and case Disassemble and Repair
Coolant is
Worn fan After diassembling, repair or
pumped but change
specified Water leakage in discharging pipe Check and repair
amount is not Low rpm Inspect or review the rotation
system
obtained.
Clogged pipe Check and clean the pipe
High gravity and viscosity Check coolant
Overload of Contacted rotation part Exchange
motor Excess discharge volume Exchange
Low voltage Contact Electric Co.
V -80 -
Table 5-7. Checking and Repairing (cont.)
Fault Possible Cause Remedy-
Clogged and unbalanced fan Disassemble and check

Vibration or
Damaged bearing or body Change
noise in pump.
Cavitation Contact the manufacturer (Maker)
3-7. Tail Stock

3-7-1. Tail Stock Construction
Center
Tail stock body
Base
Lead Screw
0.
Linear Motion Bearing
Motor
o:
Fig. 5-61 Tail Stock Construction
3-7-2. Tail Stock Operation and Adjustment of Degree
A CAUTION
• When the center work hasn’t done such as chuck, position the tail stock at
the rear end of base.
• Never use the securing center with Tail Stock.
V -81 -
HYurmni-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
1) Tail Stock Operation Method

If using Tail Stock, operate in the following orders.
a. Set the hydraulic power of tail o

ora,"
stock.
0
U
b. Chuck the warkpiece.
Chuck the workpiece
c. Forward the tail stock until the

center is reached to the hole of o
ora
warkpiece center. jj
OJ
/)
Forward the Tail Stock
d. Press the rFORj button and

0
forward the tail stock. B3 ora
)R
OJ
J)
',—4/4-
e. Press the foot switch for opening or

closing chuck 2 times and correct [01
iq]
the chucking.
Vj
'OfiT'j
Revise the chucking
Foot Switch
V -82 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUnDRI-KIH mRCHIflE
2) Pressure and thrust of Tail Stock
The relationship between pressure and thrust of Tail Stock is shown in Fig. 5-60. The
valve for controlling pressure is located at the left of machine. For adjustment of pressure
in Tail Stock, perform with the Tail Stock pressed by chucking the workpiece.
A WARNING
If setting the pressure more than the specfied value, the machine may be
broken down.
max. 450 kg
4.5kN
990 lbs
400 (kgf)
4(kN)
880 (lbs)
3(kN) 300
660
Thrust
200
2(kN)
440
100
1 (kN)
220
0 5 10 15 (kgf/cm2)
71 142 213 (Psi)
0.5 1 1.5 (MPa)
Pressure
As a reference of thrust, it is recommended to be
200 kg in 100X300mm( 4X2in) (SM45C).
Fig. 5-62 Pressure and Thrust of Tail Stock
Used Tool: wrench(5 mm)
V -83 -
HYurmni-KiR mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3) Rotation cover disassembling method
If repairing the tail stock, tool post, and etc. inside of the machine, disassemble the cover
from the right of door to extend the repair area for a convenience of maintenance. SUPER
KIATURN series are convenient to repair as the right cover is turning-syle structure.
When turning the right cover to repair, perform as follows:
Used tool: wrench (4, 5 mm)
a. Disassemble bolts (2EA) securing

the right cover to the inside of
©
machine.
b. If turning clockwise by having

insertted the wrench of 4 mm at
hinge secured in the right cover,
© R
the cover will be raised.
c. Turn the right cover by raising

more than 20 mm.
<j>.
d. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
\ lit 4ÿ •
1 %-4 !
1/
Fig. 5-63 Disassembling Turn Cover
V -84 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunnm-KiH mncHinE
4) Adjustment of Tail Stock Accuracy
The center of chuck and tail stock should be adjusted at the factory, but adjsut in the
following method if necessary.
a. Attach the dial gage, turn the inside

diameter of tail stock, loosen the bolt,
turn the flange and adjust the center
of it.
b. After turning the dial gage and

r-U*
aligning the high center direction to
“0”, engage the bolt. Make sure of
Screw for
being aligned. Disconnecting the Center
c. Loosen the securing bolt and engage Set Bolt

the bolt.
d. Turn the dial gage and check for

the direction in the X-axis.
i\p
e. Turn the adjusting screw, ensuring
the dial gage and adjust it to be “0”.
f. Check of the dial gage when a

completion of adjustment and engage -AM
the securing bolt of tail stock.
Screw for
g. When a completion of securing, Disconnecting the Center
/ Adjusting
check again the dial gage. / \y Screw
Used tools: dial gage (0.002 mm),

wrench
V -85 -
HYunnni-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-7-3. Proximity Switch Setting Method
For Checking the

Retraction of Tail Stock
&
&
$
3> %
x> For Checking'

the Cylinder
Tor Checking
Forward
the Motor OFF
Fig. 5-64 Proximity Switch Construction
Proximity Switch proximity distance setting
©;
—
1 '1.5 mm
A CAUTION
The adjustment of Proximity Switch may cause the machine not to be
operated if out of the limit.
V -86 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmm-Kin mncmnE
3-7-4. Motor Specification
1) Motor Specification
Item Specification
Power 0.2/0.1kW(0.27/0.13HP)
o
Polarity 6/12P
o
Motor Voltage 220V
Frequency 50/60Hz
Current 2.9/1.9A o.
Type Excitation operating
Prefricative Torque 1.1kg • m(10N • m)
Brake
Voltage DC24V
Capacity 15W(0.02HP) Fig. 5-65 Motor Configuration
3-8. Chuck and Cylinder
3-8-1. Chuck and Cylinder Constructions
Connecting Hydraulic
Tube Handle Chuck
Cylinder Adaptor
Tube
r '
0.
I
a*
Fig. 5-66 Chuck and Cylinder Construction

Used Tools: wrench (8, 10 mm), spanner (17 mm)
V -87 -
HYunoni-Km mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-8-2. Adjustment
1) Adjusting Sequence
a. Secure the rotation cylinder to cylinder adaptor using bolts and connecting tube to
cylinder using the connecting nut.
b. When assembling them, adjust the trembling.
Trembling Distance
Connecting tube : less than 0.1 mm

Cylinder adaptor : less than 0.01 mm
A CAUTION
If assembling the cylinder with connecting tube, do it with pulled out.
A WARNING
Turn OFF the power. Otherwise, it may cause personal injury.
c. Put the assembled cylinder bundle into the hole of spindle.

d. Fit the cylinder adaptor to the spindle flange using bolts, (trembling : less than
0.01 mm)
e. Fit the chuck to the connecting tube and assemble it to spindle.
f. Adjust the trembling of chuck to be less than 0.02 mm.
g. Engage with connecting tube handle until the stroke of jaw being within the
specified value.
h. Connect the hydraulic hose.
i. Check the chuck is opened or closed properly.
j. Raise the pressure of chuck up to the permissible pressure.
V -88 -
k. Check each part for leakage or abnormality.
1. Turn the spindle with the speed of 500 rpm and check for its vibration. (Rotate
forward for about 5 min.)
m. Slowly raise the rpm of spindle and check for its vibration.
n. If the vibration being high, stop the spindle.
o. Reassemble the cylinder.
3-8-3. Specification
1) Seizing power
Seizing power is different depending on the fueled state, used grease, height of soft
jaw. When engaging the machine in chuck and operating within the limit of maximum
permissible pressure, the actual seizing power decreases as the speed of spindle
increases because of a centrifugal power. These relationship between the speed of
spindle, power and seizing power is shown in the following graph. Use the following
jaw to obtain the seizing power of chuck.
a. Use the standard soft jaw.

b. Refill the recommended oil specified in this manual.
c. Secure the soft jaw engaging bolt in the specified torque.
Bolt size Specified torque
M6 130 kgf • cm (13 N • m)

M8 390 kgf • cm (39 N • m)
M10 640 kgf •cm (64 N • m)
M12 1090 kgf • cm (109 N •m)
M14 1740 kgf • cm (174 N • m)
M16 2550 kgf •cm (255 N • m)
M20 4100 kgf • cm (410 N •m)
d. The thrust of cylinder is the permissible maximum one.
V -89 -
HYunDRi-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2) Permissible maximum rpm of Spindle

The permissible maximum rpm of Spindle is maintained to more than 1/3 of the rated
power in the chuck seizing power when the outside end has been placed inside of the
circumference in the Chuck body. This time the maximum rpm of spindle depends on the
maximum rpm of chuck.
a. Use the standard soft jaw.

Master Jaw
b. Place the master jaw in the center - T-nut
of stroke.
Soft Jaw
c. Attach the soft jaw inside of the °0,
0.
circumference in chuck.
3) Relationship between the pressure of cylinder and seizing power of chuck.
Diameter on the portion seized in chuck : 4 70

Used jaw: standard soft jaw
Ton(kN)
9 (90) -
Chuck Seizing Power 8 (80) -
(Total of 3 jaws) 7 (70) -
6 (60)
5 (50)
•ft
4 (40) - £
3 (30) -
2 (20)
1 (10)
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 kg/cm2
(0.5) (1) (1.5) (2) (2.5) (3) (MPa)
Cylinder Pressure(kg/cnl)
A WARNING
When cutting heavily in a rapid speed, make sure the workpiece not to be
sprang out.
V -90 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDHi-KiH mncmriE
4) Attachment of Soft Jaw
a. Use the jaw nut for attaching the soft jaw of chuck within the range of soft jaw.
A DANGER
If the jaw nut has been protruded out of the circumference, only one bolt will
be engaged with jaw and may cause personal injury.
Used tools: wrench (8 mm, SKT 15), wrench (10 mm, SKT 21)
b. Install the jaw nut inside of the circumference in Chuck as shown in the following.
Master Jaw
Soft Jaw
Nut
Mo'
|0 0, |o 0
0, '°J
'o, o try
X o
5) Adjustment of proximity switch for checking the operation of cylinder
The proximity switch for confirming clamp/unclamp of the workpiece is attached inside of
the coolant collector in cylinder.
Used tool: spanner (19 mm)
a. Engage the screw of

proximity switch and
the adjusting plate so
the distances between
proximity switch and
o, au
Proximity Switch
guide flange might be
1 mm.
1mm
9ÿ
b. Check the proximity
switch for operation.
Fig. 5-67 Proximity Switch for Checking Operation of Cylinder
- V -91 -
HYurmni-Kin mncmnE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-9. Cover
3-9-1. Door Roller
Used tool: spanner (13, 17 mm)
1) Disconnect the door and
change the upper and lower
rollers.
2) If reassembling the door, check
m
the door for flat state and ftp
operation and adjust the lower
roller.
Fig. 5-68 Door Roller
3-9-2. Door Safety Glass
<-ÿ
Plate
Packing
Glass
Guard
Fig. 5-69 Door Safety Glass
Used Tool: + driver, sealing agent
V -92 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUI1DRI-KIH mRCHIflE
If the door safety glass has been broken due to the tool tip or workpiece while
operating the machine, exchange as follows:
1) Disconnect the door

2) Disconnect the plate using + driver and remove the glass.
3) Remove a piece of glass thoroughly.
4) Apply the boundary of guide with sealing agents and insert the packing into glass.
5) Put a glass on the guide and engage the plate.
3-10. Electricity
3-10-1. Electric Device Layout
X-axis
Torque L/S SQ6
Origin L/S SQ5
+ OT L/S SQ3
- OT L/S SQ4
X-axis Servo Motor- O Door L/S SQ1
•o
Coolant Pump —r ' Tool Post
Z-axis Clamp L/S SQ26
\
Origin L/S SQ9
>: x\ Unclamp L/S SQ25
Servo Motor
Ar
+ OT L/S SQ7 /
- OT L/S SQ8 /
Torque L/S SQ10
mm W\\
\
if Tail Stock Motor
Spindle Position _L
Coder
J Tail Stock
Z-axis Servo Motor —I -Retraction L/S SQ14
Cylinder Forward
Chuck Cylinder L/S SQ13
Clamp Proximity Motor Stop L/S SQ12
Switch SQ17
Unclamp Proximity
Switch SQ18
S\ Q-setter Sense LS81A
-P Hanged Checking
Spindle Motor Proximity Switch LS81B
Is
l Foot switch 3SB1.2
Tool Post
Clamp YV6A Lubrication Pump
Unclamp YV6B Pressure Switch SP3
Chuck Level Switch SL1
Clamp YV1A
Unclamp YV1B Hydraulic Motor
Tail Stock Center Hydraulic Pressure
Close-in YV2A Switch SP1
Loose YV2B
Fig. 5-70 Electric Device Layout
V -93 -
HYunDHi-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
3-10-2. Alarm Lamp(Option)

It is attached to the top of Operating Panel and
has the 1, 2 and 3 colors. It can be illuminated
(!)
STANDBY
during program or when each sort of alarm
occured and changed to the flickering style by
the PC parameter. It will be exhausted by 0AUTO CALL
POWER / BZ
pressing the “rCALL/BZ OFFj” switch of OFF OFF
Operating Panel.
1) 1 color (Yellow)
Illuminated if the alarm lamp is on by the occurence of each alarm or stop of the
programs(M00, M01, M02, M30). If the alarm lamp is on, the machine stops
temporarily and displays the text of alarm on the screen.
2) 2 colors (Green and Red)

a. Green: Illuminated when the automatic program is being performed.
b. Red: Illuminated when each alarm occurs or the program stops(M00, M01, M02,
M30). For the others, it is the same with para. 1).
3) 3 colors(Green, Yellow and Red)

a. Green: Illuminated when the automatic program is being performed.
b. Yellow: Illuminated when the program stops(M00, M01, M02, M30).
c. Red'- Illuminated when each alarm occurs. For the others, it is the same with para. 1).
3-10-3. Alarm Indicator
1) When the alarm generally has occurred, the screen will be converted to the alarm
automatically and the message “AL” or “A/B” (battery alarm) flashed in the lower
right of screen.
2) The upper side(ALARM) of alarm diagnostic screen indicates the NC alarm and the
lower (MESSAGE) displays up to 4 PC alarms.
3) To delete the alarm, remove the

ALARM MESSAGE 01234N12345
cause and then press the RESET
button. If the alarm has not been 506 OVER TRAVEL : +X
deleted by pressing the RESET
key, it will remain the alarm
state and not be returned unless OS 100 % L 0%
JOG 13:22:10
the power turned OFF.
[ALARM) [MSG] [ HISTRY ] [ 1 [
V
V -94 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunnHi-Kin mRCHinE
ALARM MESSAGE
1/2
AL-NO. MESSAGE
2000 AL-0 CP & FUSE TRIP

2001 AL-1 SPINDLE AMP ALARM
2002 AL-2 TAILSTOCK MOTOR OVERLOAD
2003 AL-3 LUB. OIL LACK/FAULT
2004 AL-4 HYD. PRESSURE DROP
2005 AL-5 AIR PRESSURE DROP
2006 AL-6 X-AXIS TORQUE ALARM
2007 AL-7 Z-AXIS TORQUE ALARM
2010 AL-10
2011 AL-11 B-AXIS TORQUE ALARM
2012 AL-12 POWER OFF NC ALARM
2013 AL-13 DOOR OPERATION INHIBIT
2014 AL-14 SPINDLE ROTATION FAULT
2015 AL-15 SPINDLE COMMAND TIME OVER
2016 AL-16 Q-SETTER ARM DOWN
2017 AL-17 ROBOT FAULT
2020 AL-20 ZERO RETURN INCOMPLETED
2021 AL-21
2022 AL-22
2023 AL-23
2024 AL-24 POWER OFF PROGRAM END
2025 AL-25 SPINDLE ORIENTATION FAIL
2026 AL-26
2027 AL-27 TOOL LIFE END
2030 AL-30 CHUCK CLAMP NG
2031 AL-31 DOOR CLOSE NG
2032 AL-32 CENTER POSITION NG
2033 AL-33 SPINDLE STOP INCOMPLETED
2034 AL-34 LNS MULTI BAR FEEDER ALARM
2035 AL-35 END OF BAR
2036 AL-36 COUNT UP
2037 AL-37 SPINDLE-DOOR INTERLOCK
V -95 -
HYUflDHI-KIH mnCHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2/2
AL-NO. MESSAGE
2040 AL-40
2041 AL-41 TURRET INDEX INHIBIT ZONE
2042 AL-42 HYDRAULIC MOTOR OVERLOAD
2043 AL-43 COOLANT MOTOR OVERLOAD
2044 AL-44
2045 AL-45 B-AXIS OVER TRAVEL
2046 AL-46 X-AXIS OVER TRAVEL
2047 AL-47 Z-AXIS OVER TRAVEL
2050 AL-50 CHIP CONVEYOR OVERLOAD
2051 AL-51
2052 AL-52 PART CATCHER FAULT
2053 AL-53 PC PARAMETER SET NG
2054 AL-54 PROGRAM START PB NG
2055 AL-55
2056 AL-56
2057 AL-57
2060 AL-60
2061 AL-61
2062 AL-62 TURRET AMP ALARM
2063 AL-63 TURRET COMPULSORY UNCLAMP
2064 AL-64 TURRET INDEX TIME OVER
2065 AL-65 COMMAND TOOL No. NG
2066 AL-66 TURRET INDEX CONDITION NG
2067 AL-67
V -96 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunnni-Kin mmzmnE
3-10-4. Parameter
Parameter is the important factor in determining the characteristics and function of
machine. There are ones for determining the standard specification and selective one,
classification, function, or the capacity or the level of the desired performance.
1) Kinds and major contents
a. NC parameter
See the NC parameter Table.
For the information, see “FANUC operating manual”.
b. PC parameter
2) How to treat the parameter
Each parameter (data) has been set at the factory and doesn’t need revise or set,
unless otherwise stated (Except for the custom macro, backlash/pitch error compensa¬
tion areas). In addition, when shipping the machine, the values of NC and PC parame¬
ter should be tagged on the machine, so keep and prepare it for further use.
3-10-5. Battery Replacement

Data that must be backed up such as the parameters and machining programs, etc.,
are saved by the lithium battery mounted in the front panel on the front of the con¬
trol power supply when the power is turned OFF.
Battery used : BR-CC7P with connector
(Matsushita Denchi Kogyo with Mitsubishi specifications)
Battery voltage : 3.0V
Alarm voltage : 2.6V
Battery capacity : 5,000mAH
Battery back up time : 7 years
Battery life : 7 years
Discharge current : 100 M or less
The battery must be replaced before the life is up to ensure proper operation of the
system(If the battery alarm is displayed, the internal data my be destroyed).
Replacement procedure
The machine(NC) power may be ON or OFF.
(1) Remove the battery cover on the front — If the power is
panel of the control power supply. turned OFF,
(2) Disconnect the connector on the battery. complete this
(3) Replace the battery and connect the connector. procedure within
(4) Replace the battery cover.
— 30 minutes.
V -97 -
HYunoHi-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Replace I
Power supply front panel
(left edge of control unit)
Battery cover
Battery Insert/ Battery
remove
Power supply PCB
t \
CPD 07 (BAT IN)
State with battery cover removed(enlarged view)
3-10-6. Servo Amp for Tool Post

1) Display flowchart
Use the display (4 -digit, 7-segment LED) on the front panel of the servo amplifier for
status display, parameter setting, etc. Set the parameters before operation, diagnose an
alarm, confirm @ button
MODE
external sequences,
and/or confirm the
—u ( status display )~ \ Diagnosis
f
/
f
Alarm ~) (Baste parameters)
f
(Expansion
f
parametere)-ÿ
operation status.
£ J (Note)
Cumulative feerfcadt pulses
E "Qÿl 18 --1
Current alarm
fpgal
Selective function 2
[pulse]
® ®
Press the MODE UP
or r
Motor speed
1 (Note) [
External VO
rac77!
Last alarm
F~51
Sedative function t
EO
Selective linclion 3
0®N bUtt0n 0nCe t0

[dm'm)
E
Signal dspby
Idoonl
Output sigwl
fiT?77] ®ft
UP
Droop pulses Second alarm
forced output
move to the next [pulse] in past
IE ESQ ®
screen. In the position Cumulative command pulses
Ipulse) JtÿleecT Third alarm
DOWN
control mode, EL ]
Command pulse I requeney
[Tsrgl
Test operation
leg77!
Fourth alarm
g
Stdusdspiay
|p~wel
Input signal selection 7 4
Posiioning operation
a
Dws)
switching power on (E [rsri [RW77! [P~43l

Speed command votege Test operation Fithelarm Parameter write Output signal selection 1
displays the symbol C Speed imt vottagefmVj Motor-less operation dsable
E [HS77!
of the cumulative Totquo Smi voltage
Torquo command w*age[mV]
Sixth alarm
feedback pulses. \L
Regenerative load ratio
ESSSl I8S58I
Paameter
m
To refer to and/or set
E
Effective load ratio
ETT51
Automatic VC
the expansion parame¬ W offset
[b ]
ters, make them valid Peak load ratio
[%]
with parameter No. £8~1

Wihin one-revolution position Note : The initial status display at power-on depends on the control mode.
[pubel
19 (parameter write
fTs I counter
Control Mode Initial Display
disable). •
Position Cumulative feedback pulses (C)
\dC I
Load Inertia moment ratio
Speed Motor speed (r)
(times] Torque Torque command voltage (U)
V -98 -
2) Status display
The servo status during operation is shown on the 4-digit, 7-segment LED display. Press
the ® 0r ®
DOWN button to change display data as desired.
When the required data is selected, the corresponding symbol is displayed. Press the
button to display that data.
Display
Name Symbol Unit Description
Range
Feedback pulses from the servo motor

encoder are counted and displayed. When the
-9999 value exceeds 9999, it begins with zero. Press
Cumulative feedback
pulses C to pulse the ® button to reset the display value to
9999 zero. When the servo motor is rotating in the
reverse direction, the decimal points in the
upper 3 digits are lit.
The servo motor speed is displayed. When

-5400
the servo motor is rotating in the reverse
Servo motor speed r to r/min
direction, the decimal points in the upper is
5400
displayed in x O.lr/ min.
The number of droop pulses in the deviation

-9999 counter is displayed. When the value exceeds
Droop pulses E to pulse ±9999, it begins with zero. When the servo
9999 motor is rotating in the reverse direction, the
decimal points in the upper 3 digits are lit.
The position command input pulses are

counted and displayed. As this value is
displayed before it is multiplied by the
-9999 electronic gear (CMX/CDV), it may not
Cumulative command P to pulse match the cumulative feedback pulses. Press
pulses 9999 the ® button to reset the display value to
zero. When the servo motor is rotating in the
reverse direction, the decimal points in the
upper 3 digits are lit.
The frequency of the position command input

pulses is displayed. This value is displayed
-400
Command pulse n to kpps before it is multiplied by the electronic
frequency 400 gear(CMX/CDV). When the servo motor is
rotating in the reverse direction, the decimal
points in the upper 3 digits are lit.
V -99 -
HYunom-KiH mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Display
Name Symbol Unit Description
Range
Analog speed command

-10.00
voltage Analog speed command voltage or analog
F to V
Analog speed limit speed limit voltage is displayed.
10.00
voltage
Analog torque command

-10.00
voltage Analog torque command voltage or analog
U to V
Analog torque limit torque limit voltage is displayed.
10.00
voltage
The ratio of regenerative power to permissible

0 regenerative power is displayed in %. As the
Regenerative load ratio L to % permissible regenerative power depends on
100 whether there is the regenerative brake
option or not, set parameter No. 0 correctly.
The continuous effective load torque is

0
Effective load ratio displayed. When rated torque is generated,
J to %
this value is 100. The effective value for
300 the past 15 seconds is displayed.
The Maximum torque generated during

0 acceleration/deceleration, etc. is displayed.
Peak load ratio b to % When rated torque is generated, this value
400 is 100%. The peak torque for the past 15
seconds is displayed.
-9999 Position within one revolution is displayed in

Within one-revolution Cy to pulse encoder pulses. When the value exceeds
position 9999 9999, it begins with 0.
Travel value from the home position (0) in

-9999
ABS counter the absolute position detection system is
LS to rev
displayed in terms of the absolute position
9999 detector’ s counter value.
0.0 The estimated ratio of the load inertia

Load inertia moment
dc to Times moment to the servo motor shaft inertia
ratio
100.0 momnet is displayed.
V-100 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDHi-KiR mncHinE
3) Diagnostic Mode
This mode is used to verify the state of outside sequence.
When being output DO signal forcedly, the decimal point of 1st column will be flashed.
Name Display Description
Not ready.
r-oF Indicates that the servo Amp is being initialized or an
alarm is occured.
Sequence
Ready.
r-on Indicates that the servo was switched on after completion
and the servo Amp is ready to operate.
CN1B-8 CN1B-7 CN1A-8 CN1A-14 CN1B-5 CN1B-17 CN1B-15

\ \ \ \ Indicates the ON-OFF states
CN1B-9
External I/O
Signal Display
Input
signal
Output
t r / CN1B-16
„ CN1A-19
of the external input/output
signals. The upper of each
segment corresponds to the
signal
input signal and lower does to
CN1A-t4 CN1B-18 CN1B-4 CN1B-6 CN1B-19 CN1A-18 the output.
doon If pressing SET for about 2 seconds, it converts to DO

forced output screen.
1 mode Moves the cursor segment to the left
set 2sec up Trun ON the CN1 output pin on the bottom of
Output Signal cursor segment.
Forced Output down Trun OFF the CN1 output pin on the bottom of
i cursor segment.
set 2sec
If pressing SET for about 2 seconds, it returns the
doon original screen.
S/W Ver. Low -AO Indicates the S/W version.
S/W Ver. High =002 Indicates tne S/W version.
V-101 -
HYunom-KiR mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
4) Parameter Setting
a. Setting of 4-digit parameter

| P 00 | Displayed when selecting the parameter setting.
Selects the number of parameter using up iwn Key.
If pressing | set |, it displays the value of parameter.
| 0000 I If pressing | up | [ down |, the screen for selecting the next parameter No.
will be displayed.
If pressing | set |, the value of parameter will be flashed and enable state
of changing.
| 0000 1 Change the data with down 1 and write the data by pressing | set
up |.
After write of data, the parameter will be displayed.
b. Setting of the 5-digit parameter

| p 03 ~| Displayed when selecting the parameter setting.
Selects the parameter No. with up down I Key.
2345 If pressing | set |, the content of parameter will be displayed to the lower
1 4 digits.
If mode I, the value of parameter will be displayed from the 1 to
4 digits.
If pressing | up | down I, the screen for selecting the next parameter No.
will be displayed.
0000 If pressing | set |, the value of parameter will be flashed and enable state
1 of changing.
If pressing | mode |, the parameter will be changed from the 1 to 5 digits.
Change the data with | up | | down | and write the value by pressing
I set I-
After write of content, the parameter will be displayed.
(In the state to enable the parameter to be changed, if pressing | mode |
for 2 seconds, it returns the parameter display state).
- V -102 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDRi-KiB mncHinE
5) Alarms and Warnings
During operation, if abnormal conditions occurs in the servo amp, the message “1121
TURRET AMP ALARM” will be displayed on the CRT and the machine be in the
emergency stop state. In this case, the alarm No. will be indicated on the servo amp in
the control panel (see the foilwing table).
Section Display Name Definition Cause Action
Alarm A.10 Undervoltage Power supply voltage 1. Power supply voltage is low Review the
dropped. (160V) 2. Power failed instantaneously for power supply.
15ms or longer.
3. Shortage of power supply capacity
caused the power supply voltage
to drop at start, etc.
4. Power switched on within 5
seconds after it had switched off.
5. Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Change the
- Checking method - servo amplifier.

Alarm (A.10) occurs if power is
switched on after all connectors
are disconnected.
A.ll Board error 1 Printed board faulty Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Change the
A.12 Memory RAM, ROM memory - Checking method - servo amplifier.
error 1 fault
Alarm (any of A.11 to 15) occurs
A.13 Clock error Printed board fault
if power is switched on after all
A.15 Memory EEPROM fault
connectors are disconnected.
error 2
A.16 Encoder Communication error 1. Encode connector disconnected. Connect
error 1 occurred between correctly.
encoder and servo 2. Encoder fault Change the
amplifier. servo motor.
3. Encoder cable faulty Repair or
(Wire breakage or short) change cable.
4. Combination of servo amplifier Use correct
and servo motor is not proper. combination.
A.17 Board CPU/parts fault Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Change the
error 2 servo amplifier.
- Checking method -
Alarm (A.17 or A.18) occurs if
A.18 Board
power is switched on after all
error 3
connectors have been disconnected.
A.20 Encoder Communication 1. Encoder connector disconnected. Connect

error 2 error occurred correctly.
between encoder 2. Encoder cable faulty Repair or
and servo amplifier. (wire breakage or short) change the
cable
V -103 -
HYunoHi-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Alarm A.24 Motor output Ground fault occurred 1. Power input wires and servo motor Connect
ground fault at servo motor outputs output wires are in contact at main correctly.
(U,V,W phases) of circuit terminal block (TE1).
servo amplifier. 2. Insulation of servo motor power Change cable.
line deteriorated.
A.25 Absolute Absolute position data 1. Reduced voltage of super capacitor After alarm has
position erase in error in encoder occurred, hold
power on for a
few minutes,
and switch it
off once, then
on again. Make
home position
return again.
2. Battery voltage low Change battery.
3. Battery cable or battery is faulty. Make home
position return
again.
A.30 Regenerative The permissible 1. Wrong setting of parameter No.O Set correctly.
error regenerative power 2. Built-in regenerative brake Connect
of the built-in resistor or regenerative brake correctly.
regenerative brake option is not connected.
resistor or regenerative 3. High -duty operation or continuous 1. Reduce the
brake option is regenerative operation caused the frequency of
exceeded. permissible regenerative power of positioning.
the regenerative brake option to be 2. Use the
exceeded. regenerative
- Checking method - brake option

of larger
Call the status display and check
capacity.
the regenerative load ratio.
3. Reduce the
load.
4. Power supply voltage increased to Review power
260V or more. supply.
Regenerative 5. Regenerative transistor faulty. Change the
transistor fault servo amplifier.
- Checking method -
1) The regenerative brake option
has overheated abnormally.
2) The alarm occurs after
removal of the built-in
regenerative brake resistor or
regenerative brake option
6. Built-in regenerative brake resistor Change servo

or regenerative brake option faulty. amplifier or
regenerative
brake option.
V -104 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYUriOHI-KIR mRCHinE
Alarm A.31 Overspeed Speed has exceeded 1. Input command pulse frequency Set command
the instantaneous exceeded the permissible pulses correctly.
permissible speed. instantaneous speed frequency.
2. Small acceleration/deceleration Increase the
time constant caused overshoot acceleration/
to be large. deceleration
time constant.
3. Servo system is instable to cause 1. Re-set servo
overshoot. gain to
proper value.
2. If servo gain
cannot be
set to proper
value:
1) Reduce load
inertia
moment
ratio; or
2) Reexamine
acceleration/
deceleration
time
constant.
4. Electronic gear ratio is large Set correctly.
(parameters No.3,4). _
5. Encoder faulty. Chnge the
servo motor.
A.32 Overcurrent Current that flew is 1. Short occurred in servo amplifier Correct the
higher than the output phases U,V and W. wiring.
permissible current of 2. Transistor (IPM) of the srvo Change the
the servo amplifier. amplifier faulty. servo amplifier.
- Checking method -
Alarm (A.32) occurs if power is
are disconnected.
3. Ground fault occurred in servo Correct the

amplifier output phases U,V and W. wiring.
4. External noise caused the Take noise
overcurrent detection circuit to suppression
misoperate. measures.
A.33 Overvoltage Converter bus 1, Lead of built-in regenerative 1. Change lead.
voltage exceeded brake resistor or regenerative 2. Connect
400V. brake option is open or correctly.
disconnected.
2. Regenerative transistor faulty. Change servo
amplifier.
V -105 -
HYunDRi-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Alarm A.33 Overvoltage The high voltage of 3. Wire breakage of built-in 1. For wire
converter exceeds regenerative brake resistor or breakage of built-
400V regenerative brake option in regenerative
brake resistor,
change servo
amplifier.
2. For wire breakage
of regenerative
brake option,
change regenerative
brake option.
4. Capacity of built-in regenerative Add regenerative
brake resistor or regenerative brake option or
brake option is insufficient. increase capacity.
A.37 Parameter Parameter setting 1. Servo amplifier fault caused the Change the
error is wrong. parameter setting to be rewritten. servo amplifier.
2. Regenerative brake option not Set parameter
used with servo amplifier was No. 0 correctly.
selected in parament No. 0.
A.46 Servo motor Servo motor 1. Ambient temperature of servo Review environment
overheat temperature rise motor is over 40 °C. so that ambient
actuated the thermal temperature is
protector. 0 to 40V.
2. Servo motor is overloaded. 1. Reduce load.
2. Review operation
pattern.
3. Use servo motor
that provides
larger output.
3. Thermal protector in encoder Change servo
is faulty. _ motor.
A.50 Overload 1 Load exceeded overload 1. Servo amplifier is used in 1. Reduce load.
protection characteristic excess of its continuous output 2. Review operation
of servo amplifier. current. pattern.
Load ratio 300% : 3. Use servo motor
2.5s or more that provides
Load ratio 200% : larger output.
100s or more 2. Servo system is instable and 1. Repeat
Servo motor locked '• hunting. acceleration/
Is or more deceleration to
execute auto
tuning.
2. Change auto
tuning response
level setting.
3. Set auto tuning
to OFF and
make gain
adjustment
manually.
3. Machine struck something. 1. Review operation
pattern.
2. Install limit
V -106 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunoni-KiR mncHinE
Alarm A.50 Overload 1 4. Wrong connection of servo motor. Connect correctly.

Servo amplifier’s output terminals
U, V, W do not match servo
motor’s input terminals U,V,W.
5. Encoder faulty.
- Checking method -
When the servo motor shaft is
ratated slowly with the servo
off, the cumulative feedback
pulses should vary in proportion
to the ratary angle. If the
indication skips or returns
midway, the encoder is faulty.
A.51 Overload 2 Machine collision or 1. Machine struck something. 1. Review

the like caused max. operation
output current to pattern.
flow successively for 2. Install limit
several seconds. switches.
2. Wrong connection of servo Connect correctly.
motor. Servo amplifier’s output
terminals U, V, W do not match
servo motor’s input terminals
U, V, W.
3. Servo system is instable and 1. Repeat
hunting. acceleration/
deceleration to
execute auto
tuning.
2. Change auto
tuning response
!
level setting.
3. Set auto
tuning to OFF
and make gain
adjustment
manually.
4. Encoder faulty. Change the servo
- Checking method - motor.
When the servo motor shaft is
ratated slowly with the servo
off, the cumulative feedback
pulses should vary in proportion
to the ratary angle. If the
indication skips or returns
midway, the encoder is faulty.
A.52 Error Droop pulse value of 1. Acceleration/deceleration time Increase the

excessive the deviation counter constant is too small. acceleration/
exceeded 80k pulses. deceleration time
constant.
2. Torque limit value (parameter Increase the
No. 28) is too small. torque limit value.
V -107 -
HYLmcmi-KiH mncmnE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Alarm A.52 Error 3. Start not allowed because of 1. Review the

excessive torque shortage due to power power supply
supply voltage drop. capacity.
2. Use servo
motor that
provide larger
output.
4. Position control gain 1 Increase set value
(parameter No. 6) value is small. and adjust to
ensure proper
operation.
5. Servo motor shaft was rotated 1. When torque
by external force. is limited,
increase the
limit value.
2. Reduce load.
3. Use servo
motor that
provides larger
output._
6. Machine struck something. 1. Review opera¬
tion pattern.
2. Install limit
switches.
7. Encoder faulty. Change the servo
motor.
8. Wrong connection of servo motor. Connect correctly.
Servo amplifier’s output terminals
U,V,W do not match servo
motor’s input terminals U, V, W.
A.8E RS-232C Communication fault 1. Communication connector is Connect correctly.
alarm occurred between disconnected.
servo amplifier and 2. Communication cable faulty. Repair or change
personal computer. (Wire breakage or short) cable.
3. Personal computer faulty. Change personal
computer.
8888 Watchdog CPU, parts faulty Fault of parts in servo amplifier Change servo
amplifier.
- Checking method -
Alarm(8888) occurs if power is
are disconnected.
Warn A.90 Warning for Runs without Home Position set. Zero return.
ing noncompletion
of Home
Position
A.92 Open battery Absolute position 1. Battery cable is open. Repair cable or
cable warning detection system change battery.
battery voltage is 2. Battery voltage dropped to 2.8V Change battery.
low. or less.
V -108 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-KiH mncHinE
Warn A.96 Zero setting Zeroing could not be 1. Command pulses were input Make provisions
ing error excuted. after droop pulses had been so that command
cleared. pulses are not
2. Droop pulses remaining are input after droop
greater than in -position range pulses are cleared.
setting.
3. Creep speed is high. Reduce creep
speed.
A.97 Error of The command tool No. error 1. Check the Pr,
command tool occurs No. 10.
No. 2. Correct the
program.
A.9F Battery Absolute position Battery voltage dropped to 3.2V Change battery.
warning detection system or less.
battery voltage is low.
A.E3 Absolute Absolute position 1. Noise entered the encoder. Take noise
position encoder pulses faulty. suppression
counter measures.
warning 2. Encoder faulty. Change servo
motor.
A.E6 Servo EMG-SG are open. External emergency stop was After ensuring
emergency made valid. (EMG-SG were safety, reset
stop_ opened.) emergency stop.
A.E9 Main circuit Servo on signal (SON) Servo on signal (SON) was Switch on main
off warning was switched on with switched on with main circuit circuit power.
main circuit power off. power off.
6) Exchanging Battery
The servo amp for Tool Post has a built-in lithum battery to ensure the confidency for a
long time as backup purpose of absolute position. The life of this battery will be about 5
years. If the battery has been less than 2.8V, the warning number of “A. 92” will be
displayed on the amp indicator. Replace the battery within 1 week after warning.
A. Battery Specification
a. Lithum Battery (nominal +3.6 V)
b. Type: MR-BAT
c. Manufacturer: Mitsubish Electric. (Co.)
A CAUTION
In the state of power off (with the servo amp not been supplied with power),
the permissible back up time will be about 10,000 hours. If the machine not
used for a long time, note that the back up data will be lost.
V -109 -
HYunnni-KiH mncHiriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
B. Exchanging the battery
A WARNING
The charging lamp will be exhausted after 10 minutes since the power has
been interrupted. After that, change the battery. Otherwise, it may result in
accidents such as shock, etc.
A CAUTION
1. Exchanging the battery must be finished within 2 hours. If exceeding 2
hours, it may result in loss of backup data.
2. If exchanging the battery, always set the home position of Tool Post (See
“Zero Setting of Tool Post”).
a. Power off the NC power in the b. Turn OFF the main power switch in the
Operating Panel. Electrical Control Panel.
f POWER]
ION
f •
m-
©
©OFF \®
c. Open the cover of amp operation

indicator. Operating Panel Cover
Battery Connector
d. Disconnect the battery connector.
e. Remove the battery from battery
holder.
f. Install new battery in the reverse order N
of removal.
g. Make sure the warning message Battery
Battery Holder
disappears.
V-110 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunnni-Kin mncmnE
3-10-7. Alarm Related to Spindle
Maintenance Instruction Related To Fanuc Spindle Error
No. Contents of status error Correction method
01 Even when *ESP( emergency stop signal, DI Check the sequences of *ESP
signal and contact signal) and MRDY and MRDY.
(machine ready completion signal) is not Pay enough attention to that
being input, SFR( spindle forward rotation the parameter is set properly
command)/SRV(spindle reverse rotation according to the fact that
command )/ORCM (orientation command) is MRDY signal(No.4001 #0) is
being input. used or not.
02 The speed detector of motor is normally set Check the parameter setting.
to 128A/rev (No.4001 #2,1,0 = 0,0,1) in the
system having high-resolution magnetic pulse
coder when the spindle and spindle motor are
set to each setting. However, it is not set to
128A/rev. In this case, motor cannot be
energized.
03 Cs profile command is being input, even Check the parameter setting of

when the parameter setting (No.4001 #5 = 0) high-resolution magnetic pulse
shows that there is no high-resolution coder.
magnetic pulse coder used.
In this case, motor cannot be energized.
04 Servo mode (rigid tap, Cs axis control, etc.) Check the parameter setting of
spindle synchro control command is being position coder signal.
input, even when the parameter setting
(No.4001 #2 = 0) shows that there is no
poisition coder signal used.
In this case, motor cannot be energized.
05 ORCM( orientation command) is being input, Check the parameter setting of

even when option parameter of orientation orientation function.
function is not set.
V -111 -
06 Low-speed characteristic winding is Check the parameter setting of

selected, even when option parameter of output switching control func¬
output switching control function is not set. tion and the power cable state
(RCH = 1) confirmation signal (RCH).
07 Even though the Cs profile command was Check the sequence

input, SFR( spindle forward rotation com¬
mand) /SRV (spindle reverse rotation
command) is not being input.
08 SFR(spindle forward rotation command)/ Check the sequence

SRV (spindle reverse rotation command) is
not being input, even though servo mode
(rigid tap, Cs axis control, etc.) control
command was already input.
09 SFR (spindle forward rotation command)/ Check the sequence

SRV (spindle reverse rotation command) is
not being input, even though spindle
synchro control command was already
input.
10 Even though the Cs profile command was Never change the mode during
input, other mode(servo mode, spindle Cs profile control commanding.
synchro control mode, orientation mode) is When changing the mode,
being commanded. release Cs profile control com¬
mand first.
11 Even though the servo mode (rigid tap, Cs Never change the mode during
axis control, etc.) command was input, servo mode commanding.
other mode(Cs profile control mode, spindle When changing the mode,
synchro control mode, orientation mode) is release servo mode command
being commanded. first.
12 Even when spindle synchro control com¬ Never change the mode during
mand is being input, other mode(Cs profile spindle synchro control com¬
control mode, servo mode, orientation manding. When changing the
mode) is being commanded. mode, release spindle synchro
control command first.
V -112 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDHi-Kifl mncHinE
13 Even when orientation command is being Never change the mode during
input, other mode(Cs profile control mode, orientation commanding.
servo mode, spindle synchro control mode) When changing the mode,
is being commanded. release orientation command
first.
14 SFR(spindle forward rotation command) Do not command two opera¬

and SRV(spindle reverse rotation com¬ tions at the same time.
mand) are being input simultaneously.
15 Cs profile control command is being Check the parameter setting

input, even when the parameter setting and DI signal.
(No. 4000 # 5 = 1) shows that differential
speed control function is not used.
16 DEFMD (differential speed mode command) Check the parameter setting

is being input, even when the parameter and differential speed mode
setting (No.4000 #5 = 0) shows that speed command.
control function is used.
17 The parameter setting of speed detector There is no speed detector

(No.4011 #2,1,0) is not proper. applicable.
Check the parameter setting.
18 Position coder type orientation is being Never change the mode during
commanded, even when the parameter orientation commanding.
setting (No.4001 #2 = 0) shows that position When changing the mode,
coder is not used. release orientation command
first.
19 Even though magnetic sensor type orienta¬ Two setting cannot exist
tion is being input, other mode(Cs profile together.
control mode, servo mode, spindle synchro Check the parameter setting.
control mode) is being commanded.
20 Both parameter setting of slave operation Command the slave operation

function validation(No.4014 #5 = 1) and as normal operation mode.
attachment of high-resolution magnetic
pulse coder (No.4001 #5) is set.
V -113 -
HYunDni-Kin mmzHiriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
21 SLV(slave operation command) is being Command the slave operation

input during position control (servo mode, as normal operation mode.
orientation, etc.) operation.
22 Position control command (servo mode, Command the slave operation

orientation, etc.) is being input during as normal operation mode.
slave operation mode.
23 SLV(slave operation command) is being Check the parameter setting.

input when the parameter setting
(No.4014 #5 = 0) shows that slave operation
function is not used.
24 When outputting continuously in the Check the INCMD( incremental

position coder type orientation, absolute command).
position command(INCMD = 0) is being When continuing absolute
input after performing incremental operation position command, perform
(INCMD = 1) initially. absolute position command
orientation first.
- V -114 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunDHi-KiH mncHiriE
Maintenance Instruction Related To Fanuc Spindle Alarm
No. Meaning and contents of alarm Correction method
“A” Program ROM surface mount error 1) Replace with specified

Control program is not functioning. ROM.
2) Replace printed board with
new one.
01 Motor overheat Reset the alarm by cooling

Temperature in the motor exceeds specified down the motor after checking
temperature. the load state.
02 Excessive speed deviation Reset the alarm after checking

Motor speed excessively deviates from the load state.
specified speed commanded.
03 Short circuit of DC link fuse Check the power transistor and

DC link fuse F4 short-circuited. replace the fuse.
04 Short circuit of input fuse, input power Replace the fuse after checking
phase open short circuit, phase open and the phase and making sure
momentary power failure of input fuse are that control power part is prop¬
detected. erly operating.
05 Short circuit of control power fuse control Replace the fuse after checking
power fuse(AF2, AF3) short-circuited. if the control power was short-
circuited
07 Overspeed Remove the cause and reset

Motor speed exceeds 115% of rated RPM. the alarm.
08 Overvoltage of input power Set the switch to AC230V.

Input power voltage switch is in the
AC200V side when input voltage is above
AC230V.
09 Overload of main circuit Cool down the radiator and

Temperature of power transistor cooling reset the alarm.
radiator is increased abnormally.
V -115 -
HYunom-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
10 Low voltage of input power. Remove the cause and reset

The voltage of input power is decreased the alarm.
under specified value.
11 Overvoltage of DC link. Remove the cause and reset

DC voltage of power circuit is increased the alarm.
abnormally.
12 Overcurrent of DC link. Remove the cause and reset

Excessive current is flowing in the DC part the alarm.
of power circuit.
13 Data memory in CPU error. Remove the cause and reset

Data memory in CPU error is detected the alarm.
when the power is ON.
15 Spindle switching/Output switching alarm. Check the sequence.

Switching sequence of spindle switching is
not properly performed.
16 RAM error. Remove the cause and reset

External data RAM error is detected when the alarm.
the power is ON.
18 Program ROM SUM check error. Remove the cause and reset
Program ROM data error is detected when the alarm.
the power is ON.
19 Excessive offset of U phase current detect¬ Remove the cause and reset
ing circuit. the alarm.
Excessive offset of U phase current
detecting circuit is detected when the
power is ON.
20 Excessive offset of V phase current Remove the cause and reset

detecting circuit. the alarm.
Excessive offset of V phase current
detecting circuit is detected when the
power is ON.
V -116 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunnni-Kin mncmriE
24 Serial transfer data error. Remove the cause and reset

Serial transfer data error occurs (Operation the alarm.
such as NC power OFF was performed).
25 Serial data transfer stop. Remove the cause and reset

Serial data transfer was stopped. the alarm.
26 Break of Cs profile controling position Remove the cause and reset

detecting signal. the alarm.
Cs profile controling position detecting
signal error occurs (Cable disconnection,
parameter setting error, etc.).
27 Break of position coder signal. Remove the cause and reset

Position coder signal error occurs (Cable the alarm.
disconnection, parameter setting error, etc.). (Turn the power ON/OFF
after setting the parameter)
28 Break of Cs profile controling position Remove the cause and reset

detecting signal. the alarm.
Cs profile controling position detecting
signal error occurs (Cable disconnection,
parameter setting error, etc.).
29 Excessive load for a short period Remove the cause and reset
Excessive load was applied continuously for the alarm.
a short period (Motor shaft binding may
occur during positioning).
30 Overcurrent of input circuit. Remove the cause and reset

Excessive current is flowing in the input the alarm.
circuit. Break of speed detecting signal.
31 Break of speed detect signal. Remove the cause and reset

The condition which disable motor from the alarm.
rotating at specified speed (extremely low
speed, binding, alarm or stop of motor) is
detected (check speed detecting signal
cable, etc.)
V -117 -
HYUflDHI-KIR mnCHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
32 Serial data transfer LSI internal RAM Remove the cause and reset
error. the alarm.
Serial data transfer LSI internal RAM error
was detected when the power is ON.
33 Insufficient charging of DC link. Remove the cause and reset

DC voltage charging of power circuit is the alarm.
insufficient when the power is ON.
34 Parameter data setting exceeding allowable Set the parameter data appro¬
value. priately.
Parameter data setting exceeds allowable
range.
35 Excessive setting for gear ratio data Set the data appropriately.
Setting for gear ratio data exceeds allow¬
able value.
36 Error count overflow Remove the cause and reset

Error count overflow occurs. the alarm.
37 Speed detector parameter setting error Set the parameter data appro¬
Parameter setting for pulse number of priately.
speed detector is not appropriately.
39 Cs profile controling 1 revolution signal Adjust the 1 revolution signal

detection error alarm. and check the cable for shield
1 revolution signal is not detected suitably state.
in the Cs profile control.
40 Cs profile controling 1 revolution signal Adjust the 1 revolution signal.

detection fail alarm.
1 revolution signal is not generated in the
Cs profile control.
41 Position coder 1 revolution signal detection Adjust the signal and check
error alarm. the cable for shield state in the
Position coder 1 revolution signal is not signal conversion circuit.
detected suitably.
V -118 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYLHIDHI-KIH mnCHIDE
42 Position coder 1 revolution signal detection Adjust the signal in the signal
fail alarm. conversion circuit.
Position coder 1 revolution signal is not.
generated.
43 Differential speed mode position coder signal Make sure that position coder
break alarm. signal of main spindle is
Position coder signal of main spindle used entering to connector CN12.
for differential speed mode is not detected.
46 Position coder 1 revolution signal detection Adjust the 1 revolution signal

error during thread cutting. and check the cable for shield
1 revolution signal is not detected suitably state in the signal conversion
during in the thread cutting. circuit.
47 Position coder signal error. Adjust the signal and check

Counting of position coder signal is not the cable for shield state in the
performed properly. signal conversion circuit.
49 Excessive conversion value of differential Calculate differential speed by

speed. multiplying relative’ s speed by
The value converted own speed into gear ratio.
relative’ s speed in the differential speed Make sure that calculated
mode exceeds allowable value. value is above maximun RPM
of motor.
50 Excessive calculation value of speed Calculate differential speed by

command during spindle synchro control. multiplying relative’ s speed by
The calculated value speed command in gear ratio.
the spindle synchro control exceeds Make sure that calculated
allowable value. value is above maximun RPM
of motor.
51 Low voltage of DC link. Remove the cause and reset

DC voltage decrease of power circuit is the alarm.
detected.
(Momentary pwer failure, poor MCC
contact)
V -119 -
HYunDHi-Km mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
52 ITP signal error 1. Printed board of servo AMP is

Error of ITP signal used for internal fault.
software is detected. Replace with new one.
53 ITP signal error 2 (hardware). Printed board of servo AMP is

Error of ITP signal used for hardware is fault.
detected. Replace with new one.
54 Overload current alarm. Remove the cause of motor

Overload of motor is detected. overload and reset the alarm.
(Estimate the heat amount generated by
motor from motor current and protect the
motor winding)
55 Power cable state error during spindle Check the spindle switching
switching / output switching. control circuit of motor power
The selection of switching request com¬ cable for proper operation.
mand and motor power cable is not
consistent during spindle switching / output
switching.
<LED display on the AMP during spindle alarm and error>
PIL PIL
ALM
ERR
01 ALM
ERR
01
<ERROR No. 01> <ALARM No. 01>
V -120 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-Km mncHiriE
3-10-8. Alarm List
1) Program errors (P/S alarm)
No. Message Contents
000 PLEASE TURN OFF A parameter which requires the power off was input,
POWER turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input).
Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd).

This alarm will be generated only when the TV check is
effective.
003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits
was input (Refer to the item of max. programmable
dimensions).
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign was input without an address
at the beginning of a block. Modify the program.
005 NO DATA AFTER The address was not followed by the appropriate data but
ADDRESS was fol-lowed by another address or EOB code. Modify
the program.
006 ILLEGAL USE OF Sign input error(Sign was input after an address
NEGATIVE SIGN with which it cannot be used. Or two or more signs
were input). Modify the program.
007 ILLEGAL USE OF Decimal point input error (A decimal point was input
DECIMAL POINT after an address with which it can not be used. Or two
decimal points were input). Modify the program.
009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS Unusable character was input in significant area.

INPUT Modify the program.
010 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the

function not provided is specified. Modify the program.
V -121 -
HYLJnDRI-KIR mRCHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Oil NO FEEDRATE Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the

COMMANDED feedrate was inadequate. Modify the program.
014 ILLEGAL LEAD In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and
COMMAND decremental outputted by address K exceed the maxi¬
mum command value or a command such that the lead
becomes a negative value is given. Modify the program.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the

RADIUS distance between the start point and the center of an arc
and that between the end point and the center of the arc
exceeded the value specified in parameter No. 3410.
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS An axis not included in the selected plane(by using G17,
COMMANDED G18, G19) was commanded in circular interpolation.
Modify the program.
022 CIRCULAR INTERPO¬ In circular interpolation, radius R, or the distance between

LATION the start point and the center of the arc, I, J, or K, has
not been specified.
020 G NO CIRCLE RADIUS When circular interpolation is specified, neither R( specify¬

ing an arc radius), nor I, J, and K (specifying the distance
from a start point to the center) is specified.
023 ILLEGAL RADIUS In circular interpolation by radius designation, negative

COMMAND value was commanded for address R. Modify the
program.
028 ILLEGAL PLANE In the plane selection command, two or more axes in the
SELECT same direction are commanded. Modify the program.
029 ILLEGAL OFFSET The offset values specified by T code is too large.
VALUE Modify the program.
030 ILLEGAL OFFSET The offset number in T function specified for tool offset
NUMBER is too large. Modify the program.
V -122 -
031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number
IN G10 following address P was excessive or it was not specified.
Modify the program.
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an off¬

VALUE IN G10 set amount by system variables, the offset amount was
excessive.
033 NO SOLUTION AT NRC A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose
radius compensation. Modify the program.
034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the
ST-UP/EXT BLK G02 or G03 mode in tool nose radius compensation.
Modify the program.
035 CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool nose radius
G31 compensation mode. Modify the program.
037 CAN NOT CHANGE The offset plane is switched in tool nose radius compen¬
PLANE IN NRC sation. Modify the program.
038 INTERFERENCE IN Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation

CIRCULAR BLOCK because the arc start point or end point coincides with
the arc center. Modify the program.
039 CHF/CNR NOT Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start-up, a

ALLOWED IN NRC cancel, or switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose
radius compensation. The program may cause overcutting
to occur in chamfering or corner R. Modify the program.
040 INTERFERENCE IN Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in

G90/G94 BLOCK canned cycle G90 or G94. Modify the program.
041 INTERFERENCE IN NRC Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation.
Modify the program.
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3rd
RETURN COMMAND and 4th reference position return command.
V -123 -
HYunnm-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread

IN THRD BLK cutting block. Modify the program.
051 MISSING MOVE AFTER Improper movement or the move distance was specified in
CHF/CNR the block next to the chamfering or corner R block.
Modify the program.
052 CODE IS NOT G01 The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is
AFTER CHF/CNR not G01. Modify the program.
053 TOO MANY ADDRESS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more
COMMANDS of I, K and R are specified. Otherwise, the character after
a comma ( ) is not C or R in direct drawing dimen¬
sions programming. Modify the program.
054 NO TAPER ALLOWED A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the
AFTER CHF/CNR corner R was specified includes a taper command. Modify
the program.
055 MISSING MOVE VALUE In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less
IN CHF/CNR than chamfer or corner R amount.
056 NO END POINT & Neither the end point nor angle is specified in the com¬
ANGLE IN CHF/CNR mand for the block next to that for which only the angle
is specified ( A ) . In the chamfering common, I(K) is
commanded for the X(Z) axis.
057 NO SOLUTION OF Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct

BLOCK END dimension drawing programming.
058 END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing
programming.
059 PROGRAM NUMBER In an external program number search or external

NOT FOUND workpiece number search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for
searching is being edited in background processing. Check
the program number and external signal. Or discontinue
the background editing.
V -124 -
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER Commanded sequence number was not found in the
NOT FOUND sequence number search. Check the sequence number.
061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT Address P or Q is not specified in G70, G71, G72, or G73
FOUND IN G70-G73 command. Modify the program.
062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1. The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or negative value.
G71-G76 2. The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value.
3. The negative value is specified to A i or A k is zero in
G74 or G75.
4. A value other than zero is specified to address U or
W, though Ai or Ak is zero in G74 or G75.
5. A negative value is specified to Ad, though the relief
direction in G74 or G75 is determined.
6. Zero or a negative value is specified to the height of
thread or depth of cut of first time in G76.
7. The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater
than the height of thread.
8. An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76.
Modify the program.
063 SEQUENCE NUMBER The sequence number specified by address P in G70,

NOT FOUND G71, G72, or G73 command cannot be searched.
Modify the program.
064 SHAPE PROGRAM NOT A target shape which is not monotonous increase or
MONOTONOUSLY decrease was specified in a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or
G72).
065 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1. GOO or G01 is not commanded at the block with the
G71-G73 sequence number which is specified by address P in
G71, G72, or G73 command.
2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block
with a sequence number which is specified by address
P in G71 or G72, respectively. Modify the program.
066 IMPROPER G-GODE IN An unallowable G code was commanded between two

G71-G73 blocks specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73.
Modify the program.
V -125 -
HYurmni-Kin mmzHiriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
067 CAN NOT OPERATE IN G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q
MDI MODE was specified. Modify the program.
069 FORMAT ERROR IN G70- The final move command in the blocks specified by P
G73 and Q of G70, G71, G72, or G73 ended with chamfering
or corner R.
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.

MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not found. Or the
program with specified program number was not found in
program number search. Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63(basic),
125 (option), 200(option), 400(option), or 1000(option).
Delete unnecessary programs and execute program
registration again.
073 PROGRAM NUMBER The commanded program number has already been used.
ALREADY IN USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary
programs and execute program registration again.
074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM The program number is other than 1 to 9999.

NUMBER Modify the program number.
075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose

number was protected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT Address P( program number) was not commanded in the
DEFINED block which includes an M98, G65, or G66 command.
Modify the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the
NESTING ERROR program.
V -126 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-KiH mncHinE
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number which was
specified by address P in the block which includes an
M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not found. The sequence
number specified by a GOTO statement was not found.
Otherwise, a called program is being edited in back¬
ground processing. Correct the program, or discontinue the
back-ground editing.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY In memory or program collation,a program in memory

ERROR does not agree with that read from an external I/O
device. Check both the programs in memory and those
from the external device.
080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL In the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37),
NOT ASSERTED the mea-surement position reach signal (XAE or ZAE) is
not turned on within an area specified in parameter 6254
(value e). This is due to a setting or operator error.
081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT Automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) was specified
FOUND IN G37 without a T code (Automatic tool compensation function).
Modify the program.
082 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED T code and automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) were
IN G37 specified in the same block (Automatic tool compensation
function). Modify the program.
083 ILLEGAL AXIS In automatic tool compensation (G36, G37), an invalid axis
COMMAND IN G37 was specified or the command is incremental. Modify the
program.
085 COMMUNICATION When entering data in the memory by using Reader /

ERROR Puncher inter-face, an overrun, parity or framing error was
generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of
baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is incorrect.
When entering data in the memory by using Reader /

086 DR SIGNAL OFF Puncher inter-face, the ready signal (DR) of reader /
puncher was turned off. Power supply of I/O unit is off
or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is defective.
V -127 -
HYunDfli-Kin mHCHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory by using Reader /
Puncher interface, though the read terminate command is
specified, input is not interrupted after 10 characters read.
I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective.
088 G LAN FILE TRANS File data transfer over the OSI-Ethernet was terminated
ERROR (CHANNEL-1) as a result of a transfer error.
089 G LAN FILE TRANS File data transfer over the OSI-Ethernet was terminated
ERROR (CHANNEL-2) as a result of a transfer error.
090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot be performed

INCOMPLETE normally because the reference position return start point
is too close to the reference position or the speed is too
slow. Separate the start point far enough from the
reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for
reference position return. Check the program contents.
091 REFERENCE RETURN In the automatic operation halt state, manual reference
INCOMPLETE position return cannot be performed.
092 AXES NOT ON THE The commanded axis by G27( Reference position return
REFERENCE POINT check) did not return to the reference position.
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted
(COORD CHG) (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the coor¬
dinate system setting operation was performed).
Perform the correct operation according to the operator’ s
manual.
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted.
(EXT OFS CHG) (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the
externa] workpiece offset amount changed). Perform the
correct operation according to the operator’ s manual.
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted.
(WRK OFS CHG) (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the
workpiece offset amount changed). Perform the correct
operation according to the operator’ s manual.
V -128 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmm-Kin mncHiriE
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted.
(AUTO EXEC) (After power ON, after emergency stop or P/S alarm 94
to 97 were reset, no automatic operation was performed).
Perform automatic operation.
098 G28 FOUND IN A command of the program restart was specified without
SEQUENCE RETURN the reference position return operation after power ON or
emergency stop, and G28 was found during search.
Perform the reference position return.
099 MDI EXEC NOT After completion of search in program restart, a move
ALLOWED AFT. command is given with MDI.
SEARCH
100 PARAMETER WRITE On the PARAMETER (SETTING) screen, PWE(parame-

ENABLE ter writing enabled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset
the system.
101 PLEASE CLEAR The power turned off while rewriting the memory by
MEMORY program edit operation. If this alarm has occurred, press
(RESET) while pressing (PROG), and only the program
being edited will be deleted. Register the deleted program.
109 P/S ALARM A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P in the
G08 code, or no value was specified.
111 CALCULATED DATA The result of calculation is out of the allowable range (-
OVERFLOW 10" to -10'29, 0, and 1029 to 1047 ).
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified (including tan 90°).
Modify the program.
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is

commanded. Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN There is an error in other formats than(Formula).

MACRO Modify the program.
V -129 -
HYunoni-KiR mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE A value not defined as a variable number is designated in

NUMBER the custom macro or in high-speed cycle cutting.
The header contents are improper in a high speed cycle
cutting. This alarm is given in the following cases:
1. The header corresponding to the specified machining
cycle num-ber called is not found.
2. The cycle connection data value is out of the allowable
range(0-999).
3. The number of data in the header is out of the
allowable range(0-32767).
4. The start data variable number of executable format
data is out of the allowable range ( #20000- #85535).
5. The storing data variable number of executable format
data is out of the allowable range ( #85535).
6. The storing start data variable number of executable
format data overlapped with the variable number used
in the header.
Modify the program.
116 WRITE PROTECTED The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose
VARIABLE substitution is inhibited. Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple).
ERROR Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative, BCD argument is neg¬
ative, or other values than 0 to 9 are present on each line
of BIN argument. Modify the program.
122 QUADRUPLE MACRO The macro modal call is specified in double.

MODAL-CALL Modify the program.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used during DNC operation.
COMMAND IN DNC Modify the program.
124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO-END does not correspond to 1:1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR IN (Formula) format is erroneous. Modify the program.

MACRO
V -130 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunoHi-KiH mncHinE
126 ILLEGAL LOOP In DOn, 1 n 3 is not established.

NUMBER Modify the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATE¬ NC and custom macro commands coexist.

MENT IN SAME BLOCK Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO The sequence number specified in the branch command
SEQUENCE NUMBER was not 0 to 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the
program.
129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT An address which is not allowed in<Argument Designa¬

ADDRESS tion) is used. Modify the program.
130 ILLEGAL AXIS An axis control command was given by PMC to an axis
OPERATION controlled by CNC. Or an axis control command was
given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC.
Modify the program.
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm
ALARM MESSAGES message. Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the
cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message
FOUND clear. Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message
ALARM MSG or exter-nal operator message. Check the PMC ladder
diagram.
135 SPINDLE ORIENTATION Without any spindle orientation, an attempt was made for
PLEASE spindle indexing. Perform spindle orientation.
136 C/H-CODE & MOVE A move command of other axes was specified to the
CMD IN SAME BLK. same block as spindle indexing addresses C, H. Modify
the program.
137 M-CODE & MOVE CMD A move command of other axes was specified to the
IN SAME BLK. same block as M-code related to spindle indexing. Modify
the program.
V -131 -
HYunom-Kin mncmnE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
138 G SUPERIMPOSED DATA In PMC axis control, the increment for pulse distribution
OVERFLOW on the CNC and PMC side are too large when the
superimposed control extended function is used.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control.
CONTROL AXIS Modify the program.
145 ILLEGAL COMMAND The conditions are incorrect when the polar coordinate
G112/G113 interpolation starts or it is canceled.
1. In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified.
2. An error is found in the plane selection. Parameters
No. 5460 and No. 5461 are incorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
146 IMPROPER G CODE G codes which cannot be specified in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode was specified. Modify the program.
150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value.
NUMBER Modify the program.
151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER The tool group commanded in the machining program is
NOT FOUND not set. Modify the value of program or parameter.
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL The number of tools within one group exceeds the
ENTRY maximum value registrable. Modify the number of tools.
153 T-CODE NOT FOUND In tool life data registration, a T code was not specified
where one should be. Correct the program.
155 ILLEGAL T-CODE IN In the machining program, M06 and T code in the same
M06 block do not correspond to the group in use. Correct the
program.
156 P/L COMMAND NOT P and L commands are missing at the head of program
FOUND in which the tool group is set. Correct the program.
157 TOO MANY TOOL The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maxi¬
GROUPS mum allowable value (See parameter No. 6800 bit 0 and
1). Modify the program.
V -132 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-Kin mncmriE
158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify the setting
DATA value.
159 TOOL DATA SETTING During executing a life data setting program, power was
INCOMPLETE turned off. Set again.
160 MISMATCH WAITING Different M code is commanded in heads 1 and 2 as

M -CODE (only with two waiting M code. Modify the program.
path control)
161 COMMAND G68/G69 G68 and G69 are not independently commanded in
INDEPENDENTLY (only balance cut. Modify the program.
with two path control)
169 ILLEGAL TOOL GEOM¬ Incorrect tool figure data in interference check.
ETRY DATA (only with
two path control)
175 ILLEGAL G107 Conditions when performing circular interpolation start or

COMMAND cancel not correct. To change the mode to the cylindrical
interpolation mode, specify the command in a format of
“G07.1 rotation-axis name radius of cylinder.”
176 IMPROPER G-CODE IN Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified
G107 in the cylindrical interpolation mode was specified.
1. G codes for positioning, such as G28, G76, G81-G89,
including the codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle
2. G codes for setting a coordinate system'. G50, G52
3. G code for selecting coordinate system'. G53 G54-G59
Modify the program.
177 CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error.

(G05 MODE) Modify the program.
178 G05 NOT ALLOWED IN G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode.
G41/G42 MODE Correct the program.
179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510
SETTING ERROR exceeds the maximum number. Modify the setting value.
V -133 -
180 COMMUNICATION Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm

ERRORCREMOTE BUF) the number of cables, parameters and I/O device.
194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle positioning (Cs-axis

SYNCHRO-MODE control) mode, or rigid tapping mode was specified during
the serial spindle synchronous control mode. Correct the
program so that the serial spindle synchronous control
mode is released in advance.
197 C-AXIS COMMANDED IN The program specified a movement along the Cf-axis
SPINDLE MODE when the signal CON(DGN = G027#7) was off. Correct
the program, or consult the PMC ladder diagram to find
the reason the signal is not turned on.
199 MACRO WORD Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom
UNDEFINED macro.
200 ILLEGAL S CODE In the rigid tapping, an S value is out of the range or is
COMMAND not specified. The maximum values for S which can be
specified in rigid tapping is set in parameters 5241 to
5243. Change the setting in the parameter or modify the
program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND In the rigid tapping, no F value is specified.

IN RIGID TAP Correct the program.
202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW In the rigid tapping, spindle distribution value is too large.
203 PROGRAM MISS AT In the rigid tapping, position for a rigid M code(M29) or
RIGID TAPPING an S command is incorrect. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS In the rigid tapping, an axis movement is specified

OPERATION between the rigid M code(M29) block and G84(G88)
block. Modify the program.
205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL Rigid tapping signal (DGNG061 #1) is not 1 when
OFF G84(G88) is executed though the rigid M code(M29) is
specified. Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the
reason the signal is not turned on.
V -134 -
210 CAN NOT COMMAND 1. M198 and M199 are executed in the schedule operation.
M198/M099 Or M198 is executed in the DNC operation. Modify the
program.
2. In a multiple repetitive pocketing canned cycle, an
interrupt macro was specified, and M99 was executed.
211 G31 (HIGH) NOT G31 is commanded in the per revolution command when
ALLOWED IN G99 the high speed skip option is provided. Modify the program.
212 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawing dimensions programming is command¬
ed for the plane other than the Z-X plane. Correct the
program.
213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Movement is commanded for the axis to be synchronously

SYNCHRO-MODE controlled.
214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift
SYNCHRO-MODE type is executed in the synchronous control. Correct the
program.
217 DUPLICATE G251 G51.2 or G251 is further commanded in the polygon

(COMMANDS) machining mode. Modify the program.
218 NOT FOUND P/Q P or Q is not commanded in the G251 block, or the
COMMAND IN G251 command value is out of the range. Modify the program.
219 COMMAND G250/G251 G251 and G250 are not independent blocks.
INDEPENDENTLY
220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by

SYNCHR-MODE the NC program or PMC axis control interface for the
synchronous axis.
221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control
SYNCHR-MODE or balance cutting are executed at a time. Modify the
program.
224 RETURN TO REFER¬ Not returned to reference point before cycle start.
ENCE POINT
V -135 -
HYunoHi-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
225 SYNCHRONOUS/MIXED This alarm is generated in the following circumstances.

CONTROL ERROR (only (Searched for during synchronous and mixed control
with two path control only) command.
1. When there is a mistake in axis number parameter
setting.
2. When there is a mistake in control commanded.
Modify the program or the parameter.
226 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A travel command has been sent to the axis being syn¬
SYNCHRO-MODE ( only chronized in synchronous mode. Modify the program or
with two path control only) the parameter.
229 CAN NOT KEEP SYN¬ This alarm is generated in the following circumstances.
CHRO-STATE (only with 1. When the synchro/mixed state could not be kept due
two path control only) to system overload.
2. The above condition occurred in CNC devices(hard-
ware) and synchrostate could not be kept (This alarm
is not generated in normal use conditions).
231 FORMAT ERROR IN G10 Any of the following errors occurred in the specified
OR L50 format at the programmable parameter input.
1. Address N or R was not entered.
2. A number not specified for a parameter was entered.
3. The axis number was too large.
4. An axis number was not specified in the axis-type
parameter.
5. An axis number was specified in the parameter which
is not an axis type.
6. An attempt was made to reset bit 4 of parameter 3202
(NE9) or change parameter 3210(PSSWD) when they
are protected by a password. Correct the program.
232 ILLEGAL AXIS COM¬ Three or more axes were specified as helical axes in the
MAND IN HELICAL helical interpolation mode.
233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that
connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were
using it.
V -136 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunnni-Kin mncmriE
239 BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed with the function
for controlling external I/O units, background editing was
performed.
240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MDI operation.
244 P/S ALARM In the skip function activated by the torque limit signal,
the number of accumulated erroneous pulses exceed 32767
before the signal was input. Therefore, the pulses cannot
be corrected with one distribution. Change the conditions,
such as federates along axes and torque limit, and try
again.
245 T-CODE NOT ALOWED One of the G codes, G50, G10, and G04, which cannot be
IN THIS BLOCK specified in the same block as a T code, was specified
with a T code.
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record ( % ) was specified.
5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION M codes which belonged to the same group were speci¬
OF M CODE fied in a block. Alternatively, an M code which must be
specified without other M codes in the block was speci¬
fied in a block with other M codes.
5018 POLYGON AXIS SPPED The rotating speed ratio of the command value cannot be
ERROR maintained in the G51.2 mode, because the speed of the
spindle or the polygon turning synchronous axis exceeds
the clamp value or itis too slow.
5020 PARAMETER OF An erroneous parameter was specified for restarting a

RESTART ERROR program.
5030 ILLEGAL COMMAND The end command (G110) was specified before the
(G100) registration start command(G101, G102, or G103) was
specified for the B-axis.
5031 ILLEGAL COMMAND While a registration start command (G101, G102, or G103)
(G100, G102, G103) was being executed, another registration start command
was specified for the B-axis.
V -137 -
5032 NEW PRG REGISTERED While the machine was moving about the B-axis, at
IN B-AXIS MOVE attempt was made to register another move command.
5033 NO PROG SPACE IN Commands for movement about the B-axis were not
MEMORY B-AXIS registered because of insufficient program memory.
5034 PLURAL COMMAND IN Multiple movements were specified with the G110 code
GUO for the B axis.
5035 NO FEEDRATE A feedrate was not specified for cutting feed about the
COMMANDED B-AXIS B-axis.
5036 ADDRESS R NOT Point R was not specified for the canned cycle for the B-
DEFINED IN G81-G86 axis.
5037 ADDRESS Q NOT Depth of cut Q was not specified for the G83 code (peck
DEFINED IN G83 drilling cycle). Alternatively, 0 was specified in Q for the
B-axis.
5038 TOO MANY START M- More than six M codes for starting movement about the
CODE COMMAND B-axis were specified.
5039 START UNREGISTERED An attempt was made to execute a program for the B-
B-AXIS PROG axis which had not been registered.
5040 CAN NOT COMMANDED The machine could not move about the B-axis because
B-AXIS MOVE parameter No. 8250 was incorrectly specified, or because
the PMC axis system could not be used.
5041 CAN NOT COMMANDED Blocks containing the G110 codes were successively
GUO BLOCK specified in tool-tip radius compensation for the B-axis.
5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER Parameters related to straightness compensation have been

(ST.COMP) erroneously specified. Possible causes are as follows '•
1. Invalid axis numbers have been assigned to move or
compensation axes.
2. The number of pitcherror compensation points between
the maximum positive and maximum negative points
exceeds 128.
V -138 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYununi-Kin mncHinE
5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER 3. Straightness compensation point numbers have been

(ST.COMP) assigned in other than ascending order.
4. Straightness compensation points could not belocated
between the maximum positive and maximum negative
pitch error compensation points.
5. The amount of compensation per compensation point is
too large or too small.
5051 M-NET CODE ERROR Abnormal character reception.

(Characters except code used to transmit).
5052 M-NET ETX ERROR “ETX” code is abnormal.
5053 M-NET CONNECT ERROR Connection time supervision error (parameter No. 175)
5054 M-NET RECEIVE ERROR Boring time supervision error (parameter No. 176)
5055 M-NET PRT/FRM ERROR Vertical parity or framing error detection.
5056 M-NET BOARD SYSTEM Transmit time-out error (parameter No. 177)
DOWN ROM parity error.
CPU interruption detection of not listed above.
5058 G35/G36 FORMAT A command for changing the major axis was specified
ERROR during circular threading. Alternatively, the length of the
major axis was specified to be 0.
5059 RADIUS IS OUT OF During circular interpolation, the center of the arc speci¬
RANGE fied with I, J, and K caused the radius to exceed nine
digits.
5073 NO DECIMAL POINT A decimal point is not specified for a command for which
a decimal point must be specified.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION The same address appears more than once in a block.
ERROR Alternatively, a block contains two or more G codes
belonging to the same group.
5082 DATA SERVER ERROR Details are displayed on the data server message screen.
V -139 -
HYunofli-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
2) Background edit alarm
070 to 074 BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same number as the P/S alarm
085 to 087 that occurs in ordinary program edit.
140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in the background a

program being selected in the foreground (Note).
Use background editing correctly.
Note
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the background
edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of
the MDI key operation.
- V -140 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYuncmi-KiH mncHinE
3) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm
300 n AXIS NEED ZRN Manual reference position return is required for the nth-
axis(n = l-8).
301 APC ALARM :n AXIS nth-axis(n = l-8) APC communication error. Failure in
COMMUNICATION data transmission Possible causes include a faulty APC,
cable, or servo interface module.
302 APC ALARM :n AXIS nth-axis(n = l-8) APC overtime error.

OVER TIME Failure in data transmission.
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo
interface module.
303 APC ALARM :n AXIS nth-axis(n = l-8) APC framing error. Failure in data
FRAMING transmission.
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo
interface module.
304 APC ALARM :n AXIS nth-axis(n = l-8) APC parity error.

PARITY Failure in data transmission. Possible causes include a
faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
305 APC ALARM :n AXIS nth-axisn = 1-8) APC pulse error alarm.
PULSE MISS APC alarm. APC or cable may be faulty.
306 APC ALARM :n AXIS nth-axis(n = l-8) APC battery voltage has decreased to a
BATTERY ZERO low level so that the data cannot be held.
APC alarm. Battery or cable may be faulty.
307 APC ALARM :n AXIS nth-axis(n = l-8) axis APC battery voltage reaches a level
BATTERY DOWN 1 where the battery must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the battery.
308 APC ALARM :n AXIS nth-axis(n = l-8) APC battery voltage has reached a level
BATTERY DOWN 2 where the battery must be renewed (including when power
is OFF). APC alarm .Replace battery.
309 APC ALARM :n AXIS An attempt was made to perform reference position return
ZRN IMPOSSIBLE without rotating the motor through one or more turns.
Rotate the motor through one or more turns, turn off the
power then on again, then perform reference position
return.
V -141 -
HYunnni-Kin mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
4) Serial pulse coder (SPC) alarms

When either of the following alarms is issued, a possible cause is a faulty serial pulse
coder or cable.
350 SPC ALARM: n AXIS The n axis(axis 1-8) pulse coder has a fault. Refer to diagnosis
PULSE CODER display No. 202 for details.
351 SPC ALARM: n AXIS n axis(axis 1-8) serial pulse coder communication enor(data trans¬
COMMUNICATION mission fault) Refer to diagnosis display No. 203 for details.
•The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 350

The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 350 (pulse coder alarm) are displayed in the
diagnosis display (No. 202) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
CSA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.

BLA : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries. This alarm has nothing to do
with alarm 350 (serial pulse coder alarm).
PHA : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. Replace the serial pulse
coder or cable.
RCA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
BZA : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first time.
Make sure that the batteries are connected.
Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform a reference position
return. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm 350 (serial pulse coder alarm).
CKA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
SPH : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. Replace the serial pulse
coder or cable.
•The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351

The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351 (communication alarm) are displayed in
the diagnosis display(No. 203) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC STB PRM
V -142 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunom-KiH mncHinE
DTE : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is efective. Replace
the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC-axis board
CRC : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective. Replace
the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC-axis board.
STB : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC-axis board.
PRM : An invalid parameter was found. Alarm 417(invalid servo parameter) is also
issued.
5) Servo alarms
400 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS The n-th axis(axis 1-8) overload signal is on. Refer to
OVERLOAD diagnosis display No. 201 for details.
401 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS The n-th axis(axis 1-8) servo amplifier READY
VRDY OFF signal (DRDY) went off.
404 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS Even though the n-th axis(axis 1-8) READY signal
VRDY ON (MOON) went off, the servo amplifier READY signal
(DRDY) is still on. Or, when the power was turned on,
DRDY went on even though MCON was off. Check that
the servo interface module and servo amp are connected.
405 SERVO ALARM: (WRONG Position control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system
ZRN) fault in the reference position return, there is the possibility
that reference position return could not be executed correctly.
Try again from the manual reference position return.
407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS The difference in synchronous axis position deviation
ERR exceeded the set value.
409 SERVO ALARM '.EXCESS An abnormal load on the servo motor was detected.
ERROR Alternatively, an abnormal load on the spindle motor was
detected in Cs mode.
V -143 -
HYUflDRI-KIH mnCHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
410 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS The position deviation value when the n-th axis (axis 1-8)
EXCESS ERR stops is larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1829 for
each axis.
411 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS The position deviation value when the n-th axis(axis 1-8)
EXCESS ERR moves is larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1828 for
each axis.
413 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS The contents of the error register for the n-th axis(axis 1-8)
LSI OVER are beyond of the range of -231 to 231. This error usually
occurs as the result of an improperly set parameters.
414 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS N-th axis(axis 1-8) digital servo system fault. Refer to
DETECT ERR diagnosis display No. 200 and No. 204 for details.
415 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS A speed higher than 511875 units/s was attempted to be set
MOTION OVER in the n-th axis(axis 1-8). This error occurs as the result of
improperly set CMR.
416 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS Position detection system fault in the n-th axis(axis 1-8)
DISCONNECT pulse coder (disconnection alarm). Refer to diagnosis display
No. 201 for details.
417 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS This alarm occurs when the n-th axis(axis 1-8) is in one of
DGTL PARAM the conditions listed below (Digital servo system alarm).
1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020(motor form) is out
of the specified limit.
2) A proper value(lll or -111) is not set in parameter No.
2022 (motor revolution direction).
3) Illegal data(a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter
No. 2023(number of speed feedback pulses per motor
revolution).
4) Illegal data(a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter
No. 2024 (number of position feedback pulses per motor
revolution).
- V -144 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-Kin mncHinE
417 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS 5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flexible field gear rate)
DGTL PARAM have not been set.
6) A value outside the limit of (1 to the number of control
axes} or a non-continuous value (Parameter 1023(servo
axis number) contains a value out of the range from 1 to
the number of axes, or an isolated value (for example, 4
not preceded by 3) was set in parameter No. 1023(servo
axis number).
421 SERVO ALARN : n AXIS While the dual position feedback function is being applied, an
EXCESS ER(D) excessive difference was detected between a semi-closed loop
error and closed loop error. Check the dual position conversion
factor set in parameter Nos. 2078 and 2079.
•Details of servo alarm No. 414

The details of servo alarm No. 414 are displayed in the diagnosis display
(No. 200 and No.204) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
OVL : An overload alarm is being generated.

(This bit causes servo alarm No. 400. The details are indicated in diagnostic
data No.201).
LV : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
OVC : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
HCA : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
HVA : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
DCA : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
V -145 -
HYunDni-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
FBA : A disconnection alarm is being generated.

(This bit causes servo alarm No.416. The details are indicated in diagnostic data
No. 201)
OF A : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
OFS : A current conversion error has occurred in the digital servo.

MCC : A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has welded.
LDA : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective
PMS : A feedback pulse error has occurred because the feedback cable is defective.
•Details of servo alarms No. 400 and No. 416

The details of servo alarms No. 400 and No. 416 are displayed in the
diagnosis display (No. 201) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP
When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 400 is
being generated) :
ALD 0 : Motor overheating
1 : Amplifier overheating
When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200(servo alarm No. 416 is being generated) :
ALD EXP Alarm details
1 0 Built-in pulse coder disconnection (hardware)
1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection (hardware)
0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to software.
V -146 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmm-Kin mncmriE
6) Over travel alarms
500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n-th axis(axis 1-8) + side stored stroke
limit I (Parameter No.1320 or 1326 Notes).
501 OVER TRAVEL : -n Exceeded the n-th axis(axis 1-8) - side stored stroke
limit I (Parameter No.1321 or 1327 Notes).
limit II(Parameter No.1322 ).
limit II(Parameter No.1323).
limit III (Parameter No.1324 ).
limit III (Parameter No.1325 ).
506 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n-th axis(axis 1-8) + side hardware OT.
507 OVER TRAVEL : -n Exceeded the n-th axis(axis 1-8) - side hardware OT.
508 INTERFERENCE : +n When n-axis is moving in the positive direction, it inter¬

feres with the order tool post (only with two-path control).
509 INTERFERENCE : -n When n-axis is moving in the negative direction, it inter¬

feres with the order tool post (only with two-path control).
510 OVER TRAVEL : +n A stroke limit check, made before starting movement,
found that the end point of a block falls within the plus
(+) side inhibited area along the n-axis defined by a
stroke limit. Correct the program.
511 OVER TRAVEL : -n A stroke limit check, made before starting movement,
found that the end point of a block falls within the
minus(-) side inhibited area along the N-axis defined by
a stroke limit. Correct the program.
V -147 -
HYurmm-KiH mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
Note
Over travel No. 504 and No. 505 are provided only with the T series.
Parameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when EXLM (stroke limit switch
signal) is on.
7) Overheat alarms
700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL Control unit overheat. Check that the fan motor operates
UNIT normally, and clean the air filter.
701 OVERHEAT: FAN The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for the control
MOTOR unit is overheated. Check the operation of the fan motor
and replace the motor if necessary.
704 OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Spindle overheat in the spindle fluctuation detection

1. If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the cutting condi¬
tion.
2. Check whether the cutting tool is share.
3. Another possible cause is a faulty spindle amp.
8) Rigid tapping alarm
740 RIGID TAP ALARM : During rigid tapping, the position deviation of the spindle in
EXCESS ERROR the stop state exceeded the setting.
741 RIGID TAP ALARM : During rigid tapping, the position deviation of the spindle in
EXCESS ERROR the stop state exceeded the setting.
742 RIGID TAP ALARM : During rigid tapping, an LSI overflow occurred on the
LSI OVER FLOW spindle side.
- V -148 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-Km mncHinE
9) Serial spindle alarms
749 S-SPINDLE LSI ERROR A communication error occurred for the serial spindle. The
cause may be the disconnection of an optical cable or the
interruption of the power to the spindle amplifier.
(Note) Unlike alarm No. 750, this alarm occurs when a serial
communication alarm is detected after the spindle amplifier is
normally activated.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK This alarm is generated when the spindle control unit is not
ERROR ready for starting correctly when the power is turned on in
the system with the serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows'.
1. An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control
unit’ s power is OFF.
2. When the NC power was turned on under alarm
conditions other than SU-01 or AL-24 which are shown
on the LED display of the spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off
once and perform startup again.
3. Other reasons (improper combination of hardware)
This alarm does not occur after the system including
the spindle control unit is activated.
4. The second spindle(when SP2, bit 4 of parameter No.
3701, is 1) is in one of the above conditions 1) to 3).
See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.
751 SPINDLE-1 ALARM This alarm indicates in the NC that an alarm is generated in
DETECT(AL-XX) the spindle unit of the system with the serial spindle. The
alarm is displayed in form AL-XX(XX is a number). Refer to
(11) Alarms displayed on spindle servo unit. The alarm
number XX is the number indicated on the spindle amplifier.
The CNC holds this number and displays on the screen.
V -149 -
HYunnm-Kin mncmriE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
752 SPINDLE-1 MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does not properly
ERROR terminate a mode change. The modes include the Cs con¬
touring, spindle positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle control unit does
not respond correctly to the mode change command issued
by the NC.
754 SPINDLE-1 ABNORMAL An abnormal load on the first spindle motor was detected.
TORQUE ALM
761 SPINDLE-2 ALARM Refer to spindle alarm No. 751(For 2nd axis).
DETECT(AL-XX)
762 SPINDLE-2 MODE CHANGE Refer to spindle alarm No. 752(For 2nd axis).
ERROR
764 SPINDLE-2 ABNORMAL Same as for alarm No. 754 (for the second spindle).
TORQUE ALM
771 SPINDLE-3 ALARM Same as for alarm No. 751(for the third spindle).
DETECT(AL-XX)
772 SPINDLE-3 MODE CHANGE Same as for alarm No. 752(for the third spindle).
ERROR
774 SPINDLE-3 ABNORMAL Same as for alarm No. 754(for the third spindle).
TORQUE ALM
V -150 -
•The details of spindle alarm No.750

The details of spindle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis display(No. 409) as
shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409 SPE S2E S1E SHE
SPE 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters fulfill the spindle unit
startup conditions.
1 In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not fulfill the spindle
'ÿ
unit startup conditions.

S2E 0 : The second spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup.
1 : The second spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle serial control
startup.
S1E 0 : The first spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup.
1 : The first spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle axis serial control
startup.
SHE 0 : The serial communications module in the CNC is normal.
1 : The serial communications module in the CNC was detected to have a fault.
10) System alarms(These alarms cannot be reset with reset key).
900 ROM PARITY ROM parity error(CNC/OMM/Servo)

Replace the number of ROM.
910 RAM PARITY :(4N) RAM parity error in the tape memory RAM module.
Clear the memory or replace the module. After this oper¬
ation, reset all data including the parameters.
911 RAM PARITY: (4N+1) RAM parity error in the tape memory RAM module.
912 RAM PARITY: (4N+2) RAM parity error in the tape memory RAM module.
V -151 -
HYurmni-Kin mncmnE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
913 RAM PARITY :(4N+3) RAM parity error in the tape memory RAM module.
914 SRAM PARITY (2N) RAM parity error for part program storage RAM or addi¬
tional SRAM. Clear memory or replace the main CPU
board or additional SRAM. Clear memory or replace the
915 SRAM PARITY (2N+1) main CPU board or additional SRAM.
Then, respecify all data including parameters.
916 DRAM PARITY RAM parity error in the DRAM module. Replace the
DRAM module.
920 SERVO ALARM Servo alarm (1st to 4th axis). A watchdog alarm or a
(1/2/3/4 AXIS) RAM parity error in the servo module occurred.
Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board.
922 SERVO ALARM Servo alarm (5th to 8th axis). A watchdog alarm or a
(5/ 6/7/8 AXIS) RAM parity er-ror in the servo module occurred.
924 SERVO MODULE Replace the servo control module on the option 2 board.
SETTING ERROR The digital servo module is not installed.
Check that the servo control module or servo interface
module on the main CPU or option 2 board is mounted
securely.
926 SERVO ALARM Servo alarm (first to sixth axis). A RAM parity error in
(1/2/3/4/5/6 AXIS) the servo module or a watchdog alarm has occurred.
Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board.
930 CPU INTERRUPT CPU error (abnormal interrupt). The main CPU board is
faulty.
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM Fault occurred in the PMC. The PMC control module on
the main CPU board or option 3 board may be faulty.
V -152 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYurmni-KiR mmzmnE
951 PMC-RC WATCH DOG Fault occurred in the PMC -RC( watchdog alarm).Option 3
ALARM board may be faulty.
970 NMI OCCURRED IN BOC RAM parity error or NMI occurred in the PMC-RB or
PMC-RA2 module.
971 NMI OCCURRED IN SLC An alarm condition occurred in the interface with an I/O
unit. For PMC-RA and PMC-RB, check that the PMC
control module on the main CPU board is connected to
the I/O unit securely. For PMC-RC, check that the PMC
control module on the option 3 board is connected to the
I/O unit is supplied with power and that the interface
module is intact.
972 NMI OCCURRED IN NMI occurred in a board other than the main CPU board.
OTHER MODULE
973 NON MASK INTERRUPT NMI occurred for an unknown reason.
974 F-BUS ERROR BUS error of FANUC BUS.

The main CPU board or option 1 to 3 boards may be
faulty.
975 BUS ERROR(MAIN) Main CPU board bus error.

The main CPU board may be faulty.
V -153 -
11) Alarms Displayed on spindle Servo Unit
No. Meaning Description Remedy
“A” Program ROM abnormality Detects that control program is not Install normal
display (not installed) started (due to program ROM not program ROM
installed, etc.)
AL01 Motor overheat Detects motor speed exceeding Check load status. Cool
specified speed excessively. motor then reset alarm.
AL02 Excessive speed deviation Detects motor speed exceeding Check load status.
specified speed excessively. Reset alarm.
AL03 DC link section fuse blown Detects that fuse F4 in DC link Check power
section is blown (models 30S and transistors, and so
40S). forth. Replace fuse.
AL04 Input fuse blown. Detects blown fuse (FI to F3), open Replace fuse.
Input power open phase. phase or mo-mentary failure of power Check open phase
(models 30S and 40S). and power supply
refenerative circuit
operation.
AL05 Control power supply fuse Detects that control power supply Check for control
blown fuse AF2 or AF3 is blown (models power supply short
30S and 40S). circuit. Replace fuse.
AL07 Excessive speed Detects that motor rotation has Reset alarm.
exceeded 115% of its rated speed.
AL-08 High input voltage Detects that switch is flipped to 200 Flip switch to 230
VAC when input voltage is 230 VAC VAC.
or higher (models 30S and 40S).
AL-09 Excessive load on main Detects abnormal temperature rise of Cool radiator then
circuit section. power transistor radiator. reset alarm.
AL-10 Low input voltage. Detects drop in input power supply Remove cause, then
voltage. reset alarm.
V -154 -
No. Message Contents Remedy
AL-11 Overvoltage in DC link Detects abnormally high direct current Remove cause, then
section power supply voltage in power circuit reset alarm.
section.
AL-12 Overcurrent in DC link Detects flow of abnormally large Remove cause, then
section current in direct current section of reset alarm.
power circuit
AL-13 CPU internal data memory Detects abnormality in CPU internal Remove cause, then
abnormality data memory. This check is made reset alarm.
only when power is turned on.
AL-15 Spindle switch/output Detects incorrect switch sequence in Check sequence.

switch alarm spindle switch/output switch
operation.
AL-16 RAM abnormality Detects abnormality in RAM for Remove cause, then
external data. This check is made reset alarm.
only when power is turned on.
AL-18 Program ROM sum check Detects program ROM data error. Remove cause, then
error This check is made only when power reset alarm.
is turned on.
AL-19 Excessive U phase current Detects excessive U phase current Remove cause, then
detection circuit offset detection circuit offset. reset alarm.
This check is made only when power
is turned on.
AL-20 Excessive V phase current Detects excessive V phase current Remove cause, then
detection circuit offset detection circuit offset. reset alarm.
This check is made only when power
is turned on.
AL-24 Serial transfer data error Detects serial transfer data error (such Remove cause, then
as NC power supply turned off, etc.) reset alarm.
V -155 -
HYunoni-Kin mncHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
AL-25 Serial data transfer stopped Detects that serial data transfer has Remove cause, then
stopped. reset alarm.
AL-26 Disconnection of speed Detects abnormality in position coder Remove cause, then
detection signal for Cs signal (such as unconnected cable and reset alarm.
contouring control parameter setting error).
AL-27 Position coder signal Detects abnormality in position coder Remove cause, then
disconnection signal (such as unconnected cable and reset alarm.
adjustment error).
AL-28 Disconnection of position Detects abnormality in position Remove cause, then

detection signal for Cs detection signal for Cs contouring reset alarm.
con-touring control control (such as unconnected cable and
adjustment error).
AL-29 Short-time overload Detects that overload has been Remove cause, then
continuously applied for some period reset alarm.
of time (such as restraining motor
shaft in positioning).
AL-30 Input circuit overcurrent Detects overcurrent flowing in input Remove cause, then
circuit. reset alarm.
AL-31 Speed detection signal dis¬ Detects that motor cannot rotate at Remove cause, then
connection motor restraint specified speed or it is detected that reset alarm.
alarm or motor is clamped. the motor is clamped (but rotates at
very slow speed or has stopped) (This
includes checking of speed detection
signal cable).
AL-32 Abnormality in RAM Detects abnormality in RAM interior Remove cause, then
internal to LSI for serial LSI for serial data transfer. This reset alarm.
data transfer. This check check is made only when power is
is made only when power turned on.
is turned on.
V -156 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYunoHi-KiR mncHinE
AL-33 Insufficient DC link section Detects insufficient charging of direct Remove cause, then
charging current power supply voltage in reset alarm.
power circuit section when magnetic
contactor in amplifier is turned
on (such as open phase and defective
charging resistor).
AL-34 Parameter data setting Detects parameter data set beyond Set correct data.
beyond allowable range of allowable range of values.
values
AL-35 Exccesive gear ratio data Detects gear ratio data set beyond Set correct data.
setting allowable range of values.
AL-36 Error counter over flow Detects error counter overflow. Correct cause, then
reset alarm.
AL-37 Speed detector parameter Detects incorrect setting of parameter Set correct data.
setting error for number of speed detection pulses.
AL-39 Alarm for indicating failure Detects 1-rotation signal detection Make 1-rotation
in detecting 1-rotation failure in Cs contouring contorl. signal adjustment.
signal for Cs contouring Check cable shield
control status.
AL-40 Alarm for indicating 1- Detects that 1-rotation signal has not Make 1-rotation
rotation signal for Cs occurred in Cs contouring control. signal adjustment.
contouring control not
detected
AL-41 Alarm for indicating failure Detects failure in detecting position Make signal
in detecting position coder coder 1-rotation signal. adjustment for signal
1-rotation signal. conversion circuit.
Check cable shield
status.
V -157 -
HYunoni-Kin mnczHinE V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION
AL-42 Alarm for indicating Detects that position coder 1-rotation Make 1-rotation
position coder 1-rotation signal has not issued. signal adjustment for
signal not detected signal conversion
circuit.
AL-43 Alarm for indicating Detects that main spindle position Check that main
disconnection of position coder signal used for differential speed spindle position coder
coder signal for differential mode is not connected yet (or is signal is connected to
speed mode disconnected). connector CN12.
AL-46 Alarm for indicating failure Detects failure in detecting position Make 1-rotation
in detecting position coder coder 1-rotation signals in thread signal adjustment for
1-rotation signal in thread cutting operation. signal conversion
cutting operation. circuit. Check cable
shield status.
AL-47 Position coder signal Detects incorrect position coder signal Make signal
abnormality count operation. adjustment for signal
conversion circuit.
Check cable shield
status.
AL-48 Position coder 1-rotation Detects that occurrence of position Make 1-rotation
signal abnormality coder 1-rotation signal has stopped. signal adjustment for
signal conversion
circuit.
AL-49 The converted differential Detects that speed of other spindle Check the position
speed is too high. converted to speed of local spindle coder state of the
has exceeded allowable limit in other side.
differential mode.
AL-50 Excessive speed command Detects that speed command Check parameters
calculation value in spindle calculation value exceeded allowable such as a position
synchronization control range in spindle synchronization gain.
control.
V -158 -
V. REPAIR AND PRESERVATION HYuriDHi-Kin mncHinE
AL-51 Undervoltage at DC link Detects that DC power supply voltage Remove cause, then
section of power circuit has dropped (due to reset alarm.
momentary power failure or loose
contact of magnetic contactor).
AL-52 ITP signal abnormality I Detects abnormality in synchronization Remove cause, then
signal (ITP signal )with CNC(such as reset alarm.
loss of ITP signal).
AL-53 ITP signal abnormality II Detects abnormality in synchronization Remove cause, then
signal (ITP signal) with CNC(such as reset alarm.
loss of ITP signal).
AL-54 Overload current alarm Detects that excessive current flowed Check if overload
in motor for long time. operation or frequent
acceleration/decelerati
on is performed.
AL-55 Power line abnormality in Detects that switch request signal Check operation of
spindle switching/output does not match power line status magnetic contractor
switching check signal. for power line
switching.
Check if power line
status check signal is
processed normally.
V -159 -
HYuncmi-KiH mncHinE
APPENDIX
' 'i
APPENDIX
I
A-1. Spindle Amplifier Module A-5

A-1-1. Alarm AO, A1 A -5
A-1 -2. Alarm AL-01 A-6
A-1 -3. Alarm AL-02 A-6
A-1 -4. Alarm AL-03 A-7 |
A-1 -5. Alarm AL-07 A-8
A-1 -6. Alarm AL-09 A-8
A-1 -7. Alarm AL-12 A-8
A-1 -8. Alarm AL-13 A-9
A-1 -9. Alarm AL-15 A-9
A-1-1 0. Alarm AL-16 A-10
A-1 -11. Alarm AL-19 A-10 1
A-1 -12. Alarm AL-20 A-10
A-1 -13. Alarm AL-24 A-ii a
A-1 -14. Alarm AL-25 A-ll
|
A-1 -15. Alarm AL-26 A-12
A-1 -16. Alarm AL-27 A 12
A-1-17. Alarm AL-28 A-13
A-1 -18. Alarm AL-29 A-14
A-1 -19. Alarm AL-31 A-15
A-1 -20. Alarm AL-32 A-15 i
A-1 -21. Alarm AL-34 A-15
A-1 -22. Alarm AL-35 A-16
A-1-23. Alarm AL-36 A-16
A-1-24. Alarm AL-37 A-17
A-1-25. Alarm AL-39 A-17
A-1-26. Alarm AL-40 A-18
A-1-27. Alarm AL-41 A-19
A-1-28. Alarm AL-42 A-19
A-1-29. Alarm AL-43 A-20
A-1-30. Alarm AL-44 A-21
A-1-31. Alarm AL-46 A-21 j
A-1-32. Alarm AL-47 A-22
A-1-33. Alarm AL-49 A-23
A-1-34. Alarm AL-50 A-2.'i
A-1-35. Alarm AL-53 A-23

A-1-36. Alarm AL-54 A-24
A-1-37. Alarm AL-55 A-24
A-1-38. Alarm AL-56 A-25
R
I
1
APPENDIX HYLmoni-Kin mncmnE
A-1. Spindle Amplifier Module
If an alarm occurs in the spindle amplifier module, the ALM LED lights red in the
STATUS display, and the two-digit 7-segment LEDs indicate the alarm code.
STATUS
PIL
ALM Z
"
III
u I
ERR
Alarm code AO, Al, 01 or above is indicated.
The ALM LED lights red.
A-1-1. Alarm AO, A1
(1) Meaning
The control program is not running.
(2) Cause and corrective action

(a) ROM installed improperly or yet to be installed
Make sure that the ROM is attached properly to the socket and there is no
imperfect contact due to a broken or bent pin.
=> Install the ROM properly.
(b) Incorrect ROM installed

The series number of the software is printed on the ROM package and is
displayed at power-on.
=> Replace it with the correct ROM.
(c) Printed-circuit board defective

=> Replace it with a normal printed circuit board.
- A-5 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE APPENDIX
A-1-2. Alarm AL-01
(1) Meaning
The temperature inside the motor is higher than the rating.

(a) Over loaded operation
Check the cutting conditions, the state of the cutting tool, and the load meter
reading during cutting.
=> Examine the cutting conditions and the tool.
(b) The cooling fan inside the motor is defective.

Check whether the cooling fan rotates smoothly.
=> Replace the cooling fan.
(c) The motor cooling system is dirty.

=> Clean the cooling system with a vacuum cleaner or the factory air blower.
(d) Motor overheat signal wire discontinued or loosely connected

Check the motor overheat signal wire for secure connection.
=> Connect the signal wire properly.
(e) Invalid detector parameter setting

Check the detector and its parameters.
=> Set the parameters that match the detector correctly.
(f) Motor or thermostat defective

=» Replace the motor.
A-1-3. Alarm AL-02
(1) Meaning
The actual motor speed is largely deviated from the commanded speed.

(a) Over loaded operation or too heavy load
Check the load meter to see if the load is too heavy.
=> Examine the cutting conditions and the tool again.
- A-6 -
APPENDIX HYunDfli-Kin mncmriE
(b) Abnormal power line connect
Check the power line for disconnection or poor contact.
=> Connect the power line properly.
(c) Incorrect acceleration/deceleration duration parameter setting

Check the parameter setting and the actual acceleration/deceleration duration.
FS16/18 Description
4082 Acceleration/deceleration duration setting
=> Set the parameter with a value somewhat greater (margin) than the required
acceleration/deceleration duration.
(d) Incorrect speed detector parameter setting

Check the parameter setting and the speed detector.
FS16/18 Description
4011 #2, 1, 0 Speed detector setting
=> Set the parameter correctly according to the speed detector.

(e) IGBT module/IPM defective
Replace the IGBT module/IPM.
(f) Speed feedback signal faulty

Check the speed feedback signal level.
=> Check the speed detector. Also check the signal cable for continuity.
A-1-4. Alarm AL-03
(1) Meaning
The fuse at the DC link has blown.

(a) Overcurrent flowed in the main circuit.
Check the IGBT module/IPM. If the IGBT module/IPM is defective, it allows
overcurrent to flow in the main circuit.
=> Replace the fuse and/or IGBT module/IPM.
- A-7 -
HYunDHi-KiR mncHinE APPENDIX
A-1-5. Alarm AL-07
(1) Meaning
The actual motor speed exceeded 115% of the maximum allowable motor speed
(standard parameter setting). Cause and corrective action.
(a) Incorrect speed detector parameter setting
FS16/18 Description
=> Set the parameter correctly according to the speed detector.
A-1-6. Alarm AL-09
(1) Meaning
The temperature of the main circuit heat sink has risen abnormally.

(a) Cooling fan defective
(b) Overloaded operation

=> Examine the cutting conditions again.
(c) Cooling fan clogged

=> Clean the cooling fan with a vacuum cleaner or the factory air blower.
A-1-7. Alarm AL-12
(1) Meaning
Excessive current flowed in the DC section (DC link) of the main circuit.
The main circuit power module (IPM) detected an error.
- A-8 -
APPENDIX HYUriDFII-KIH ITIflCHinE
(a) Short-circuit between the amplifier output terminals or inside the motor
Check the power line connection for a short-circuit.
=> Make a correct connection. Replace the motor if it is defective.
(b) IGBT(or IPM) defective

Replace the IGBT(or IPM).
(c) Printed -circuit board defective

=> Replace the printed circuit board.
(d) Incorrect model -specific parameters.

Check the model-specific parameter settings with the model specific parameter list.
=> Set the parameters with the values that match the motor used.
A-1-8. Alarm AL-13
( 1) Meaning
The memory inside the CPU is abnormal. It is checked when power is switched on.

(a) Printed-circuit board defective
=> Replace the printed circuit board.
A-1-9. Alarm AL-15
(1) Meaning
A sequence of switching operations was incorrect during speed range switching
control or spindle switching control. Cause and corrective action
(a) Switching unit (magnetic contactor for power line switching) defective
Check the operation of the switching unit.
=> Replace the switching unit.
(b) Loose contact of the magnetic contactor state signal (auxiliary contact signal)
Make sure that the magnetic contactor state signal is switched properly.
=> Connect the magnetic contactor correctly.
- A-9 -
HYunDHi-Kin mncHinE APPENDIX
(c) Improper sequence

=> Adjust the switching unit for the correct sequence.
A-1-10. Alarm AL-16
(1) Meaning
The memory (RAM) is abnormal. It is checked when power is switched on.

(a) Printed-circuit board defective
=> Replace the printed-circuit board.
A-1-11. Alarm AL-19
(1) Meaning
The offset voltage for the phase U current detection circuit is too high.
This check is made when power is switched on.

(a) Loose contact of the printed -circuit board
Check that the printed -circuit board is connected to the power circuit securely.
=> Connect the printed -circuit board securely.
(b) Phase U current detection circuit defective.

=> Replace the printed -circuit board.
(c) A/D converter defective

A-1-12. Alarm AL-20
(1) Meaning
The offset voltage for the phase V current detection circuit is too high.
This check is made when power is switched on.

(a) Loose contact of the printed -circuit board
- A-10 -
APPENDIX HYUnDHI-Kin mfiCHIflE
Check that the printed-circuit board is connected to the power circuit securely.
=> Connect the printed -circuit board securely.
(b) Phase V current detection circuit defective.
A-1-13. Alarm AL-24
(1) Meaning
The serial communication data between the CNC and spindle amplifier is abnormal.
(This alarm occurs also when the CNC power is switched off.)

(a) The CNC power is off.
=> Switch on the CNC power.
(b) Serial communication cable defective

Check the connection of the cable. Also check for a broken wire.
=> Connect the cable correctly. If any wire in the cable is broken, replace it.
(c) Serial communication LSI chip defective

=> Replace the LSI chip or the printed -circuit board with the LSI on it.
(d) I/O link adapter defective(if used)

=» Replace the I/O link adapter.
A-1-14. Alarm AL-25
(1) Meaning
Serial communication between the CNC and the spindle amplifier has stopped.

(a) Serial communication cable defective
(b) Serial communication LSI chip defective

- A-ll -
HYunnni-KiH mRCHinE APPENDIX
A-1-15. Alarm AL-26
(1) Meaning
The Cs contouring control speed detection signal (detector on the motor side) is
abnormal.

(a) Feedback signal cable defective
(b) Feedback signal level insufficient

Check the feedback signal level with an oscilloscope.
=> Adjust so that the feedback signal level becomes the rated value.
(c) Feedback signal cable not shielded properly (circuit malfunction due to noise)
Check whether the cable is shielded properly.
=> Shield it correctly.
(d) Detection circuit defective

(e) Incorrect parameter setting

Check the parameter setting for use of the Cs contouring control detector.
FS16/18 Description
4011 #5 Parameter set to specify use of the

Cs contouring control detector.
=> Set the parameter correctly according to the detector used.
A-1-16. Alarm AL-27
(1) Meaning
Position coder signal error
Cause and corrective action
- A-12 -
APPENDIX HYunnm-Kin mncmriE
(b) Position coder defective

Check the position coder signal.
=> Replace the position coder.
(c) Feedback signal level insufficient (for built-in sensor or the high -resolution magnetic
pulse coder)
(d) Feedback signal cable not shielded properly (circuit malfunction due to noise)
(e) Detection circuit defective

(f) Incorrect parameter setting

Check the parameter set to specify use of the Cs contouring control detector.
FS16/18 Description

A-1-17. Alarm AL-28
(1) Meaning
The Cs contouring control speed detection signal (detector on the spindle side) is
abnormal.

- A-13 -
HYurmni-Km mncmriE APPENDIX
=> Connect the cable correctly. If any wire in the cable is broken, replace it
(c) Feedback signal cable not shielded properly (circuit malfunction due to noise)

(e) Incorrect parameter setting

Check the parameter set to specify use of the Cs contouring control detector.
FS16/18 Description

=> Set the parameter correctly.
A-1-18. Alarm AL-29
(1) Meaning
Excessive load (at least 90% of the maximum output as set initially by a parameter)
was applied continuously for a certain period (30 seconds as set initially by a
parameter) .

(a) Overloaded operation, or too heavy load
=> Examine the cutting conditions and the tool again.
- A-14 -
APPENDIX HYunDHi-Kin mncHinE
A-1-19. Alarm AL-31
(1) Meaning
The motor cannot rotate at a specified speed. It rotates at very low speed, or even
stops.

(a) Motor locked
Check whether the motor cannot accelerate because it is physically locked.
=> Remove the cause.
(b) Motor speed feedback cable defective

=> Connect the cable correctly. If any wire in the cable is broken, replace it
(c) Motor speed feedback signal abnormal

Check the speed feedback signal with an oscilloscope.
(d) Incorrect power line wire connection

Check the connection of the power line wires (for phase order, etc.)
=> Connect the power line correctly.
A-1-20. Alarm AL-32
(1) Meaning
The memory in the serial communication LSI chip is abnormal. It is checked when
power is turned on.

(a) LSI chip defective
A-1-21. Alarm AL-34
(1) Meaning
The parameter setting is invalid.
- A-15 -
HYurmni-KiR mncHinE APPENDIX

(a) Incorrect parameter setting
Check the parameter setting
=> Set the parameter with a valid value.
A-1-22. Alarm AL-35
(1) Meaning
The value set in the gear ratio data parameter is greater than the limit allowed in
the internal processing.

(a) Incorrect gear ratio parameter setting
Check whether the specified gear ratio is too high.
FS16/18 Description
4056 to 4059 Spindle-to-motor gear ratio
A-1-23. Alarm AL-36
(1) Meaning
The error counter overflowed.

(a) Incorrect parameter setting
Check whether the values set in the gear ratio and position gain parameters are
too large.
FS16/18 Description
4056 to 4059 Spindle-to-motor gear ratio data
4060 to 4063 Position gain during orientation

4065 to 4068 Position gain during servo mode/
synchronization control of the spindle
4069 to 4072 Position gain during Cs contouring control
- A-16 -
APPENDIX HYurmm-Kin mncHinE
A-1-24. Alarm AL-37
(1) Meaning
When an emergency stop signal was entered, the motor did not decelerate, rather
accelerate, or the motor was kept excited even after acceleration/deceleration duration
(10 seconds as set initially by a parameter).

(a) Incorrect speed detector parameter setting
FS16/18 Description
=> Set the parameter to the value that matches the speed detector used.
(b) Incorrect acceleration/deceleration duration parameter setting

Check the parameter setting with the required deceleration time.
FS16/18 Description
4082 Acceleration/deceleration duration setting
=> Set the parameter with a value somewhat greater (margin) than the required
deceleration duration.
A-1-25. Alarm AL-39
(1) Meaning
The Cs contouring control one-rotation signal has not been detected correctly.

(a) Feedback signal cable not shielded properly
Check whether there is noise on the feedback signal.
Also check whether the cable is shielded properly.
- A-17 -
HYunDHi-KiR mncHinE APPENDIX

(c) Incorrect parameter setting

Check the parameter setting for use of the Cs contouring control detector.
FS16/18 Description
4003 #7, 6, 4 Parameter set to specify use of the

A-1-26. Alarm AL-40
(1) Meaning
The Cs contouring control one-rotation signal is not generated.

(a.) Feedback signal cable defective
Check the connection of the cable.
=> Connect the cable correctly.

Check the offset of the Cs contouring control one-rotation signal with an
oscilloscope.
=> Adjust the offset of the Cs contouring control one-rotation signal.
(c) Detection circuit defective

- A-18 -
APPENDIX HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE
A-1-27. Alarm AL-41
(1) Meaning
The position coder one-rotation signal was not detected correctly.

Check whether there is noise on the feedback signal. Also check whether the cable
is shielded properly.

(c) Feedback signal level insufficient ( for built-in sensor)

(d) Incorrect parameter setting

Check the parameter setting and the Cs contouring control detector.
FS16/18 Description
4003 #7, 6, 4 Position coder signal setting

A-1-28. Alarm AL-42
(1) Meaning
The position coder one-rotation signal was not generated.
- A-19 -
HYunDHi-KiH mncHinE APPENDIX

Check the connection of the cable.
=> Connect the cable correctly.

(c) Feedback signal level insufficient (for built-in sensor)

=> Adjust the feedback signal level.

A-1-29. Alarm AL-43
(1) Meaning
The position coder signal used for the main spindle during the differential speed
mode was disconnected.

=> Connect the cable correctly. If any wire in the cable is broken, replace the
cable.
(b) Feedback signal cable not shielded properly

(c) Position coder defective

- A-20 -
APPENDIX HYURDHI-KIH mncHinE
Check the parameter setting for the differential speed mode functions.
FS16/18 Description
4003 #5 Setting to specify use of the
differential speed mode functions.
=> Set the parameter correctly according to the function used.

A-1-30. Alarm AL-44
(1) Meaning
An A/D converter error occurred.

(a) A/D converter defective.
A-1-31. Alarm AL-46
(1) Meaning
The position coder one-rotation signal was not detected correctly during thread
cutting.


- A-21 -
HYunom-KiH mncHinE APPENDIX


Check the parameter setting and the Cs contouring control detector.
FS16/18 Description

A-1-32. Alarm AL-47
(1) Meaning
A pulse count for the position coder signal is abnormal.




Check the parameter setting and the detector.
- A -22 -
APPENDIX HYunoHi-Kin mncHinE
FS16/18 Description

A-1-33. Alarm AL-49
(1) Meaning
During differential speed mode, the sub-spindle motor speed converted from the main
spindle motor speed exceeded the limit.

(a) The differential speed is calculated by multiplying the main spindle motor speed
by the gear ratio.
Make sure that the calculation result does not exceed the maximum motor speed.
=> Do not exceed the maximum motor speed.
A-1-34. Alarm AL-50
(1) Meaning
During the synchronization control of the spindle, the calculation result for the speed
command exceeded the limit.

(a) The motor speed command is calculated by multiplying the spindle speed
command by the gear ratio.
Make sure that the calculation result does not exceed the maximum motor speed.
=> Do not exceed the maximum motor speed.
A-1-35. Alarm AL-53
(1) Meaning
The ITP signal(sync signal for sync with the CNC) stopped.
- A-23 -
HYunDRi-KiH mncHinE APPENDIX

(a) CNC error
=> Check the operation of the CNC.
(b) Serial communication LSI chip defective

A-1-36. Alarm AL-54
(1) Meaning
It was detected that a high current flowed in the motor for a long period.

(a) Overloaded operation, or frequent acceleration/deceleration
Check the load meter to see if the load is too heavy. Also check that acceleration/
deceleration was repeated frequently.
=> Examine the cutting conditions again.
A-1-37. Alarm AL-55
(1) Meaning
During spindle switching control or speed range switching control, there was a
conflict between the switch request signal (SPSL or RSL) and the power line state
confirmation signal(MCFN, MFNHG, or RCH, RCHHG).

(a) Switching unit (magnetic contactor for power line switching) defective
Check the operation of the switching unit.
=> Replace the switching unit (magnetic contactor for power line switching).
(b) Loose contact of the magnetic contactor state signal (auxiliary contact signal)
Make sure that the magnetic contactor state signal is switched properly.
=> Connect the magnetic contactor correctly.
(c) Incorrect parameter setting

Make sure that the parameters for the power line state signals related to spindle
switch control and output switch control are set correctly.
- A-24 -
APPENDIX HYurmni-Kin mncmnE
FS16/18 Description
4014 #2 Parameter to specify the power line

state signal for spindle switching control.
4014 #3 Parameter to specify the power line state
signal for speed range switching control.
A-1-38. Alarm AL-56

Set the parameter correctly according to the system used.
(1) Meaning
The cooling fan for the control circuit stopped.

(a) Cooling fan defective
- A -25 -
B. Tool Post Home Position Setting (FANUC)
(1) Period of Home Position Setting
Because the absolute position detector is used as the position detection system of
tool post servo, the home position setting of Tool Post should be performed in
the following cases.
® If have disassembled or reassembled the servo motor.

(2) If exchanging the servo amp.
® If exchanging the battery.
® If disconnecting the detector connector of servo motor.
(2) Home Position Setting Method

Check the Turret Clamp L/S status. (TURRET CLAMP L/S = "1")
And press the “MDI" mode in the sheet key.
® Set the KEEP RELAY PARAMETER K5#0 = '1
(2) Unclamp the turret by simultaneously SPINDLE CZQ>
pressing TSpindle STOPJ , r SELECT J ,

<T© I® o |3F0R I [y-OGÿ If BEV || jjTOpJ
SELECT
TFEEDHOLDJ on the operating panel.

The message “2067 TURRET COMPULSORY
ALARM MESSAGE 01234 N12345
UNCLAMP" will be displayed on the
alarm screen. 506 OVER TRAVEL : +X
OS 100% L 0%
JOG **** *** 13 : 33 : 10
[ ALARM ] [ MSG ] [ HISTORY ] [ ] !
u
(3) Turn the turret by hand and set the
No. 1 tool. Turn the turret and remain
it on the position where the arrows of
turret and tool post body are aligned.
s?$
X «
-1 -
© Press the ["CALL/BZ OFFJ switch.
The turret is clamped and “2067” CALL
/BZ
disappears on the alarm screen. OFF
/}
(5) Verify that X0.7 has been changed

to “1” in the diagnostic screen. NO 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0 1
© Set the KEEP RELAY PARAMETER K5#0 = "O'.
© Press the Spindle TSTOPJ , Mode

select SELECT J and [ FEEDHOLDJ switch
11 U SPINDLE nmc =31
simul taneously PROGRAM E> jrÿ1 EL) EE 1
START
<t> ©
FEED HOID
@ © IjgjJ
t*r I
Now the home position setting of tool »» J
post is completed and turret index is

enabled.
(3) TOOL NO. SETTING

Select the PMM( Power Mate CNC Manager) Parameter screen.
1. Set the basic parameter for turret.
(Set PMM Parameter No.ll#0 = '0')
2. Press the “MDI” mode.
3. Set the KEEP RELAY PARAMETER K5#0 = '1'.
=> The Alarm Message “AL-75 TURRET ADJUST MODE' is displayed.
=> Unclamp the Turret compulsorily.
4. Turn the Turret by hand and set the No. 1 tool.
5. Clamp the Turret compulsorily.
=> Set the KEEP RELAY PARAMETER K5#0 = 'O'.
6. Set the PMM Parameter No.ll#0 = '1'.
=> The Alarm Message “AL-133 POWER UNIT OFF REQUIRE' is displayed.
7. Turn off and then re-apply the power.
=> The Alarm Message “AL-61 TURRET SET UP ERROR' is displayed.
8. Press the Spindle TSTOPJ , Mode select TSELECT] and T FEEDHOLDJ switch
simultaneously
-2-
Tool Post Home Position Setting
1). Select the MDI Mode.
2). Set the KEEP RELAY Parameter K5#0 = "V.
3). Adjust in the following method.
( START )
y r
<-
TURRET COMPULSORY UNCLAMP
SPINDLE SELECT FEED HOLD
STOP + <ll> + ©
N
±
The Alarm Message is displayed? AL-67 TURRET
(X1000.6 = "1". Y1003.1 = "1") COMPULSORY UNCLAMP
J Y
Turn the turret bv hand
T
Remain it on the position
where the MARKING (E0>
TURRET COMPULSORY CLAMP
CALL
/BZ
Press the OFF S/W.
Check the Turret Clamp L7S N

( X0.7 = "1", Y 1 003.0 = "1" )
1 f
KEEP RELAY
K5#0 = ”0" SETTING
T
Turret Home Positon SETTING
SPINDLE FEED HOLD
STOP + +
1 r
Check the Home Position signal N

(X64 #4. #7 = ON/OFF)
Y
Check the Turret JOG INDEX
TT
C STOP )
B-l. TURRET SERVO AMP
(1) $ SERVO TURRETÿH TIME CHART
HOST CNC | SERVO AMP UNIT |

CNC PMC i
CD OOOOl ; JOG & AUTO MODE

(Start enabled state)
TOOAA;
t Processing Function code = "2"

by PMC Command data 1 (feed type code)
Command data 2 (Turret No.)
"ST" signal or "+X.-X" signal
Operation completion UUnclamp command signal (UCPC2)
I
i Unclamp comp let in I
© (UCPS2 = 1)
Operat ion completion 2
* Move command execution, auto-

,I matic operation start state.
Operation completion 3'Clamp command signal (UCPC2)

(D
Clamp completion i
© {
(UCPS2 = 0)
I Response data (Turret No.)
I
Operation completion 4
I
I
FIN Processing Start enabled
by PMC state
I Alarm state occurrence
When execution has I
terminated abnormal ly | AL signal and the number of
Processing
I by PMC alarms/alarm numbers.
© ALARM indication
-4-
© When the host NC program executes a T code command, the PMC on the host NC sets
the function code, command data 1, and command data 2, then sends the ST signal
or +X/-X signal to the servo unit. Upon receipt of the data, the servo unit returns
the operation completion 1 signal to the NC, and also outputs the unclamp command
signal.
© When unclamp completion notification is sent from the host NC, the servo unit
returns the operation completion 2 signal to the host NC, then starts movement
to the position corresponding to a specified turret/magazine number.
(3) Upon completion of the movement, the servo unit returns the operation completion 3
signal to the NC, and also outputs the clamp command signal.
© When clamp completion notification is sent from the host NC, the servo unit returns
response data (turret/magazine number or coordinates) and the operation completion
4 signal, and is placed in the start enabled state.
(5) Upon receipt of the operation completion 4 signal, the PMC on the host NC returns
the FIN signal.
© If an alarm is issued while the servo unit is executing an instruction, the AL

signal is output. So, the PMC on the host NC is to perform processing such as alarm
indication. In this case, the number of alarms and alarm numbers can be included in
the response data by setting the DSAL signal to 1.
[ Supplementary information ]
1. The unclamp/clamp command signal and state signal are used for communication with
the host.
2. Whether the unclamp/clamp state signal is to be checked is specified by setting
bit 2(IGCP)of parameter No. 003. When IGCP is set such that no check is to be made,
the operation completion 2 signal and operation completion 3 signal are not
output.
3. Use parameter No. 167 to set the period between the servo unit being turned on and
the output of the unclamp command signal. Use parameter No. 168 to set the period
between the clamp command signal being output and the servo unit being turned off.
4. The “ST" signal can be accepted in the start enabled state only.
5. The start enabled state is that state in which the STL signal is off.
-5-
(2) Coordinate System Setting.
HOST CNC | SERVO AMP UNIT |
CNC PMC
© Start of coordinate
system sett ing.
AUTO MODE
Start enabled state
Processing Function CODE = "10"

by PMC Command data 1 (Turret No. setting)
Command data 2 (Turret No.
"ST" signal
Operation completion 1
© I i
End of ST signal
acceptance
A workpiece coordinate system is

established which uses the current
position as specified absolute co¬
ordinates.
Operat ion completion 4
End of coordinate
Start enabled state
system setting.
© In coordinate system setting, the PMC on the host NC sets the function code,
command data 1, and command data 2, then sends the ST signal to the servo unit.
Upon receipt of the data, the servo unit returns the operation completion 1 signal
to the NC.
(2) Upon completion of coordinate system setting, the servo unit returns the operation
completion 4 signal, and is placed in the start enabled state.
[ Supplementary information ]
1) The start enabled state is that state in which the STL signal is off.
-6-
(3)0 DI/DO diagnosis signal
1) 0 AMP DO signal (CNC -> PMM)
r u;
7 5 3 &
ADDRESS
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Y64 ST (YCPS2 -X +X DSAL MD4 m2 Mi)V.
(000) 1
Y65 IGNVRY DRC ABSRD *.ILK SVI-X *ESP ERST
(001) 1 1 1
Y66 Functibn code - Command DATA t
(002)
Y67 (003) Command DATA 2
(Command TOOL NO.)
Y70 (006) BINARY DATA
Y71 RT DRN ROV2 ROV1 *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1
(007) 1 1
CAUTION
1) DGN numbers 000 to 015 correspond to signal addresses Yy+0 to Yy+15,
respectively.
2) DGN numbers 008 to 015(signal addresses Yy+8 to Yy+15)are not used for
the peripheral equipment control interface.
2) 0 AMP DI signal (PMM CNC)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADDRESS
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
X64 OPC4 OPC3 OPC2 OPC1 INPX SUPX IPLX DEN2
(016) 1
X65 OP SA STL UCPC2 DRCO ABSWT
(017) 1 1
X66 MA AL DSP2 DSP1 DSALO TRQM RST ZPX
(018) 1 1
X67 (019) Response DATA
(Current TOOL NO.)
X70 (022) BINARY DATA
X71 SVERX PSG12 PSQT MVX APBAL MVDX
(023) 1 1 1
CAUTION
1) DGN numbers 016 to 031 correspond to signal addresses Xx+0 to Xx+15,
respectively.
2) DGN numbers 024 to 031 (signal addresses Xx+8 to Xx+15)are not used for
the peripheral equipment control interface are used as response area for
power motion manager.
-7-
(4) CHECK PROCEDURE
1. Turn on the power.

When the LED indicates data other other than - or 0
Refer to the explanation of troubleshooting in Part III.
2. The LED indicates (Minus).
3. The emergency stop state is released.
The LED does not indicate "0"
Check the *ESP signal applied to the servo unit.

Check the *ESP signal applied through the I/O link.
4. The LED indicates "0" (Zero).
5. Issue a command from the host controller.
6. Check the operation of the servo motor.
An alarm is issued.
Refer to the explanation of trouble¬
shooting in Part III.
The motor does not rotate.
Check the Command.

Check the parameter settings.
Check *RILK applied to the servo unit.
The motor malfunctions.
Refer to the "FANUC AC Servo Motor Parameter Manual"
-8-
(5) LED Indications and Meanings
< LED Indications and Meanings >

• -,v
indication
Amp I i f ier This indicates that control power (+24V DC)

is supplied. No alarm is issued, but the motor
L not ready is not activated.
n Amp I i f ier
ready
This indicates that the motor is activated,
and that commands can now be accepted.
n
u Command being
executed.
This indicates that an accepted command is
now being executed.
Blinking
B
Blinking
Parameter being
I oaded .
This indicates that parameters are being
loaded in a batch from the power motion manager
or through the RS-232C interface
Indication An alarm is issued.

other than Alarm For information about alarms, see the ex¬
the above planation of troubleshooting in Part III.
-9-
(6)
'
/? SERVO AMP Alarm Detect Function
'
„Plttt bda I tr I «- ia; ......

B
This alarm is issued when the DC
Over vo I tage
voltage of the main circuit power is
(HV)
too high.
B
DC link This alarm is issued when the DC
low voltage voltage of the main circuit power is
(LVDC) too low.
This alarm is issued when the average

1 Regenerative
overheat regenerative discharge energy is too
(DCOH) high
POWER Overheat The load on the motor may be too

(OH) high.
o READY
This alarm is issued when the fan
ALM Fan stop
motor built into the servo AMP has
(FAL)
fai led.
This alarm is issued when an exces¬

ON overcurrent
sively large current flows in the
(HC)
main circuit
i 1
This indicates that control power
AMP (+24VDC) is suppl iea.
NOT READY No alarm is issued, but the motor is
I I
not activated.
B
This indicates that the motor is
AMP
activate, and that commands can now
READY
be accepted.
- 10 -
(7) $ AMP Function Codes
Function ’
d'ata. 2 Mode ROWaÿR ;

code 4 Bit '
4 Byte :
0 Jog
JOG +X/-X
. operation
1: Automatic operation
(shortcut rotation) Turret Set an amount of
2: Automatic operation travel per ATC
/magazine AUTO ST
(positive direction) rotation and the
2 :ATC
3: Automatic operation number number of turrets/
operation (negative direction) magazines in the
4: 1 -pitch rotation parameters.
5: Continuous indexing JOG +X/-X (Caution 2, 9)
_ (Caution 1)
(Caution 3)
3 :POINT Feedrate code 1 to 7 Point number
AUTO ST (Caution 4)
positioning 1 5: Rapid traverse 1 to 12 (Caution 5)
Reference position No.
1: First ZRN position
ST
2: Second ZRN POS.
4 Reference 3: Third ZRN position JOG
position (Caution 4)
15: Reference position
return number(Caution 6) +X/-X
15: Reference position
external setting ST
_ (Caution 8)
5 Positioning
Feedrate code 1 to 7 Workpiece
(absolute AUTO ST (Caution 3)
1 5: Rapid traverse coordinates
specification)
6 Positioning
(Incremental Feedrate code 1 to
7
Travel distance AUTO ST (Caution 3)
15: Rapid traverse
specification)
1 : Coordinate system
The coordinates
10 : Coordinate setting Coordiantes corresponding to
2: Magazine number
system Magazine No. AUTO ST a number repre¬
setting
setting Point No. sent the current
3: Point Number
setting _ position.
14 Point data Data is entered

into the parameter
external Point number 1 to 12 Point data JOG ST
corresponding to
setting a point number.
A coordinate is
15 :Data entered into para¬
Point number
setting by JOG ST meter correspon¬
1 to 12
teaching ding toa point
number.
- 11 -
CAUT ION
1. If the remaining distance to the next point is shorter than the required decel¬
eration distance for stopping at that point when the feed axis and direction
selection switch(+X, -X) is released, movement is made to the poing immediately
after the next point.
2. Set bit KROTX) of parameter No.000(for rotation axis setting) to 1, and set bit
7(R0AX) of parameter No. 000 to 1 (for rollover)
3. As the position corresponding to each point number, workpiece coordinates are

set in parameter Nos. 154 to 165.
4. The feedrates of feedrate codes 1 to 7 are set in parameter Nos. 044 to 050, and
a rapid traverse rate is set in parameter No. 040.
5. In rollover setting, shortcut control is possible. In rollover setting, set a

value within +1 rotation for the absolute positioning command.
6. When a reference position is set after the power is turned on, magazine/turret .
number 1 is output. Before reference position setting, perform movement by jog
operation for a minimum given distance at a minimum given feedrate(distance and
feedrate for accumulating a servo position deviation of 128 pulses or more).
Then, set function code 4, and command data 1 = 15, and turn on +X/-X to perform
reference position return. If bit 1 (SZRN) of parameter No. 011 is set, the
reference position can be shifted one grid each time +X/-X is turned on.
7. Normal jog feed operation can be used only when function code 0, 1, 10, or 15 is
specified.
8. When an absoulute pulse coder is used, the current position can be used as a
reference position. After positioning to a reference position, set function code
4, command data 1=15, jog mode, and emergency stop release state, then turn on
the ST signal .
9. In ATC automatic operation mode, the rapid traverse rate(parameter No. 040) is
used unconditionally. In jog operation mode, the rapid traverse rate(parameter
No. 040) is used when the RT signal is turned on. The jog feedrate(parameter No.
041) is used when the RT signal is turned off.
10. Never change the current mode during operationl. The mode can be changed only
after operation has been stopped.
- 12 -
(8) SIGNAL DETAILS - The peripheral equipment
SYMB , APtf. __ ' Description " r
Remaining travel in-range signal

This signal indicates that, in the servo unit, the number of axis move
command distribution pulses that have not been used for axis movement
(residual movement amount) is smaller than a parameter-specified value.
•The s i gna I becomes 1 when :
- The number of axis move command distribution pulses that have not
been used for axis movement ( residual movement amount) is smaller
than a parameter-specified value.
DEN2 X64.0 - The number of axis move command distribution not
pulses that have
been used for axis movement (residua I movement amount) is larger than
a parameter-specified value.
- When the value of a parameter for the remaining travel in-range
signal is 0.
CAUT ION
1. The DEN2 signal remains 0 during jog feed (JOG).
2. The DEN2 signal maintains its current state until another
k
move command is issued.
Distribution pulse signal

This signal indicates that the servo unit has axis move command dis¬
tribution pulses that have not been used for axis movement (residual
movement amount).
• The signal is 1 when :
- There are axis move command distribution pulses that have not been
IPLX X64.1
used for axis movement (residua I movement amount).
- There are no axis move command distribution pulses that have not
been used for axis movement (residua I movement amount).
CAUT ION
The IPLX signal is valid while jog feed(JOG) mode is set.
Acceleration/deceleration pulse signal

This signal indicates that the servo unit has accumulated pulses in the
acceleration/deceleration control section.
SUPX X64.2 •The signal is 1 when axis movement distribution pulses are accumul¬
ated in the ACC/DEC control section.
•The signal is 0 when no axis movement distribution pulses are ac¬
cumulated in the ACC/DEC control section.
- 13 -
SYMB. k •
boscriptfori: V V ; , „ / ~j
In-position signal
This signal indicates that the controlled axis is in position (has
reached the specified value).
•The s i gna I i s 1 when :
- There is no ACC/OEC del ay (accumulated pulses) for the controlled

INPX X64.3 axis, and the servo positional deviation is within a parameter-
specified range.
•The s i gna I i s 0 when :
- There is an ACC/DEC delay(accumulated pulses)for the controlled axis

- The servo positional deviation falls outside a parameter-specified
range.
Operation completion signal
The servo unit indicates information about the completion of each
function code. The host executes its sequence according to this signal.
See the timing chart of each function code for the corresponding input
timing.
•OPC1 indicates, to the host, that the servo unit has received a
command. The servo unit issues an unclamp command signal (UCPC2=1) to
OPC1 X64.4 request the host to unclamp the machine.
OPC2 X64.5 •0PC2 indicates, to the host, that the servo unit has received an
OPC3 X64.6 unclamp completed command signal (UCPS2=1) . The servo unit starts axis
OPC4 X64.7 operat ion.
0PC3 is output simultaneously with the clamp command signal (UCPC2=0)
when axis operation is completed.
•0PC4 indicates, to the host, that the servo unit has received the
clamp completion signal (UCPS2=0) and finished executing all commands.

The timing at which the signal is input is set in parameter No. 166.
The clammp signal can be prevented from being used by resetting the
NCLP parameter (bit 1 ot parameter No.003) to 0.
Unclamp command signal
The host is responsible for clamping and unclamping the machine.
The servo unit issues this signal to request the host to clamp/unclamp
the machine when a peripheral equipment control function code command
is executed.
The signal is set to 1 when a request is issued to the host to unclamp
the machine. It is reset to 0 when a request is issued to the host to
UCPC2 X65.4
clamp the machine. The servo unit sets the UCPC2 signal to 1 when it
starts executing commands whth function codes 0 and 2 to 6. When the
move command is terminated, the UCPC2 signal is reset to 0. See the
timing chart for the function codes for peripheral equipment control.
CAUT ION
The UCPC2 signal is valid when the NCLP parameter (bit 1 of
parameter No. 003) is 0. _
- 14 -
SY#B. A».
Automatic operation start in-progress signal
The signal indicates that automatic operation has been started.
STL X65.5
•The signal becomes 1 when a command to start automatic operation is
issued. It becomes 0 when automatic operation stops.
Servo preparation completion signal
This signal indicates that the servo unit is ready to operate.
Conversely, if this signal is not issured, the servo unit is not
operating.
•SA = "1”
- Self-diagnosis in the servo system completes normally when the
power to the control unit is switched on.
- A Servo alarm (if any has occurred) is reset.
SA X65.6
- An emergency stop condition (if any has occurred) is reset.
•SA = "0"
- The power to the control unit is switched off.
- A servo alarm condition is detected.
- An emergency stop is effected.
CAUT ION
In the servo-off state, the SA signal remains at 1 unless a
condition which resets it to 0 ocurs.
Automatic operation signal
This signal indicates that a series of automatic operations is in
progress.
OP X65.7
•The signal becomes 1 when a command to start automatic operation is
issued. The signal remains set to 1 even after automatic operation
stops. It becomes 0 upon the occurrence of a reset. _
Reference position return completion signal
The signal becomes 1 when :
- Manual reference position return is completed, and the servo unit
enters the in-position state.
ZPX X66.0
- Function code command-based reference position return is completed,
and the servo unit enters the in-position state.
The signal becomes 0 when the servo unit moves out of the reference
position.
Reset in-progress signal

This signal indicates that the control unit is being reset.
•The signal becomes 0 when a reset is completed.
RST X66.1
•The signal becomes 1 when a reset is in progress.
That is, the external reset signal ERS is "1", or the emergency stop
signal *ESP is 0.
- 15 -
SYM&. Ait). - '
I
Alarm output state check signal
The servo unit indicates the contents of the response data.
DSALO X66.3 When the signal is 0, 1 turret, magazine, point number, or coordinates
are being output as response data. When the signal is 1, the number of
alarms and the first alarm number are being output as response data.
Response data check signals

The servo unit indicates the contents of the response data.
DSP1 The servo unit specifies the response data using a combination of
X66.4 signals, as I isted blow.
X66.5
DSP2 DSP2 DSP1 Response ;data
1 1 Coordinate
1 0 Current position number
Alarm signal
This signal indicates that the servo unit is in an alarm state.
- The servo unit enters an alarm state

P/S Alarm, Pulse Coder Alarm, Servo Alarm, Over Travel Alarm.
AL X66.6
- The Servo unit is released from an alarm state by a reset.

Some alarms occur again after they are reset, unless their cause is
removed. So, the AL signal is issued again immediately. In this
case, the AL signal may become 0 for a moment.
Preparation completion signal

This signal indicates that the servo unit is ready to operate.
Self-diagnosis in the servo unit completes normally when the power

MA X66.7
is switched on.
• The signal becomes 0 when :
- The power to the servo unit is switched off.

- A control unit error such as a CPU or memory failure is detected.
- 16 -
SYMB. ADD.
Response data
A) The servo unit outputs the current position number (po i nt , turret, or
magazine number) for point or ATC control. This response data is set
X67 up upon the completion of positioning. The servo unit continues to
output the previous number until the new response data is set up.
Data
X70 B) Machine coordinates or workpiece coordinates can be output in real
time according to the setting of parameter No. 020.
C) When the DSAL signal is 1, the servo unit outputs the number of
alarms and the first alarm number.
Movement direction signal

The servo unit indicates the movement direction of its controlled axis.
•The signal becomes 1 when controlled axis movement in the negative
di rect ion begins.
•The signal is 0 when controlled axis movement in the positive
direct ion begins.
MVDX X71 .0 'CAUTION N
1. The MVDX signal is valid while jog feed(JOG)mode is set.
2. The MVDX signal maintains its current state during a stop.
It does not become 0 even upon a stop after movement in the
negat ive direct ion.
3. The servo unit outputs the MVX signal even during follow-
L up, provided the necessary condition is satisfied. .
Absolute pulse coder battery alarm signal

This signal indicates that the batteries of the absolute pulse coder
require replacement.
•The signal becomes 1 when :
The absolute pulse coder battery voltage is low.
APBAL X71 .1 • The s i gna I becomes 0 when :
The batteries are replaced, and the battery voltage becomes highter
than or equal to the rating.
This alarm will occur agin after it is reset, unless the batteries
are replaced. So, the APBAL signal is immediately issued again. In
this case, the APBAL signal may become 0 for a moment.
- 17 -
_
•
SYMB. ADO. I Description |
Axis movement in-progress signal
The signal indicates that movement along the controlled axis is being
performed.
- Controlled axis movement begins.
•The signal becomes 0 when :
MVX X71 .2
- Controlled axis movement ends, and the controlled axis enters the
in-posi ton state.
CAUT ION
1. The MVX signal is valid while jog feed(JOG) mode is set.
2. The MVX signal is output even during follow-up, provided
the necessary conditions are satisfied._
Area signals
The Cervo unit indicates that the current machine coordinates are
PSG1 X71 .3 within a parameter-specified range, using two code signal outputs.
PSG2 X71 .4 CAUT ION
The servo unit outputs the PSG1 and PSG2 signals even during
follow-up, provided the necessary condition is satisfied.
Servo posit inal deviation monitor signal

This signal indicates that, in the servo unit, the amount of servo
positional deviation has exceeded a parameter-specified value.
•The signal is 1 when the servo positional deviation amount is larger
than a parameter-specified value.
SVERX X71 .6
-A parameter-specified value for the servo positional deviation

amount is 0
- Ther servo positional deviatin amount is within a parameter-
specified range.
- 18 -
SYMB. ADD. • :' '•'ÿ , . - •
Mode select ion signal

This signal selects an operation mode.
The signal is a code signal consisting of thhree bits : MD1 , MD2, and
MD4. The code signal selects one of three modes : automatic operation
(AUTO), handle feed(HANDLE) , or jog(JOG), according to the combinatin
MD1 Y64.0 of these bits.

MD2 Y64.1 MD1 MD2 MD* :
MD4 Y64.2 1 0 0 Automatic operation (AUTO)

0 0 1 Handle feed (HANDLE)
1 0 1 Jog feed by +X and -X (JOG)
CAUT ION
Do not switch the operation mode during automatic operation.
Stop automatic operation before switching the operation mode.
Alarm out command signal

The host specifies that alarm information be output as response data.
When DSAL is 1, the following information is output as response data.
X67 Number of alarm (byte type)
DSAL Y64.3
X68.X69 Alarmnumber (word type)
When the signal is 0, a turret, magazine, point number, or coordinates
are output as response data. When the signal is 1, the number of alarms
and the first alarm number are output as response data.
Feed axis and direction selection signals

These signals select the direction in which jog feed movement (rotat ion)
is to be performed, and cause it to be performed in the selected
di rect ion.
- The signals are valid when jog feed(JOG) is selected. They indicate
the direction of feed. After JOG mode is selected, changing +X or
-X, whichever is desired, from 0 to 1 causes and keeps movement in
the corresponding direction at a feedrate specified by the override
+X Y64.4 signals *0V1 to *0V8 or the manual rapid traverse selection signal
-X Y64.5 RT, provided the signal is 1.
r CAUTION
1. Simultaneously setting +X and -X to 1 results in neither
direction being se!ected(dquivalent to when both are 0).
2. If a feed axis selection signal becomes 1 before the jog
feed selection signal (JOG) becomes 1, these signals are
ignored. If the JOG signal is 1, it must be reset to 0
before the feed axis selection signal is set. The servo
k unit begins feeding when the JOG signal rises.
- 19 -
SYMB . Abb. j Description
Clamp/unclamp state output signal
When the servo unit requests c I amp ing/unc lamping of the machine,-
using the UCPC2 signal, the host actually clamps/unclamps the machine.
Upon the completion of clamping/unclamping, it reports it to the servo
unit, which then proceeds to the next processing.
UCPS2 Y64.6 The signal is set to 1 when the machine is undamped. When it is
clamped, the signal is reset to 0. See the timing chart for the
function codes for peripheral equipment control.
CAUT ION
The UCPS2 signal is valid when the NCLP parameter (bit 1 of
parameter No.003) is 0. _
Automatic operation start signal
The host starts function code commands, such as part of peripheral
equipment control ATC operations and point positioning. Specifically,
the host issues a direct command to start 32-block buffering.
When the ST signal is set to 1 then reset to 0 again, the servo unit
ST Y64.7
begins operat ing.
CAUT ION
It is also possible to start operation at the rising edge
(from off to on) of the ST signal as specified by the STON
parameter (bit 7 of parameter No. 003)
External reset signal

This signal resets the servo unit.
•When the signal becomes 1, the servo unit operates as follows :
- The servo unit immediately decelerates axis movement to a stop.
- After a stop, the servo unit is reset, then the following are
ERS Y65.0 canceled :
«*ÿ
Function code commands being executed, buffered, and sent as an
input signal .
1®= Alarm conditions (if any).
- While the external reset signal is 1, jog and function code commands
cannot be issued.
Emergency stop signal
This signal brings the control unit to an emergency stop.
•When the signal becomes 0, the control unit operates as follows :
- The control unit decelerates axis movement to a stop immediately.
- A reset is applied after the stop.
- When the emergency stop signal is 0, the servo preparation completion
*ESP Y65.1
signal SA is also 0, because the servo system is not operating. If axis
movement occurs while the servo system is not operating, the amount of
movement is reflected in the current position coordinates held in the
control un i t ( f o I low-up)
- While the emergency stop signal is 0, jog and function code commands
cannot be issued.
- 20 -
fcweWWfeit ‘ L \jV
'
SYMB. ADD/
Servo-off command signal
The host turns off the servo circuit for a controlled axis, that is,
shuts off the current to the servo motor of the controlled axis. This
disables positioning control. Position detection continues, however.
So, the current position will not be lost.
The servo motor remains off while the signal is 1. If the machine is
moved by the application of external force, its coordinates are
shifted, because positioning control does not work during the servo-off
state. How the shifted machine coordinates are handled can be selected
by a parameter, as follow :
1. The machine coordinate shift is recorded in an error counter.
When the servo-off signal becomes 0, the machine moves to cancel
out the error recorded in the error counter.
2. Follow-up is performed.
SVFX Y65.2
The machine coordinate shift is regarded as being the result of a
command, and the control unit adjusts its current position data so
that the error counter becomes 0. With this method, the machine
remains in a shifted position even after the servo-off signal
becomes 0. However, the machine moves to the correct position the
next time an absolute command is issued, because the control unit
has information about the correct position.
[ USE ]
Generally, method(l) above is used to prevent excessive current flowing
through the servo motor when it ts clamped mechanically with a force
stronger than the servo motor can generate. Usually, the host keeps the
interlock signal at 0 while the servo-off signal is 1. Generally,
method(2) is used to operate the machine by rotating the motor with a
handle feed mechanism.
Inter lock signal

The host stops sending jog feed and function code commands.
•When the * I LK signal is 0, the host resets jog feed and function code
command signals to 0 to decelerate and stop controlled axis feed.
*ILK Y65.3 When it becomes 1, movement is resumed immediately. No command other
than a move command is affected.
CAUT ION
The interlock signal is valid when jog feed (-X or +X) is
being performed based on the jog feed selection signal (JOG)
- 21 -
SYMB. m. Bsscription ;y
V READY OFF alarm ignore signal

This signal is used to disable the detection of "Servo alarm(No.0401) :
V ready off" for the controlled axis.
When the signal becomes 1, the control unit behaves as follows :
IGNVRY Y65.6
•Even when the servo amplifier preparation completion signal is off,
"servo alarm(No.401) : V ready off" is not detected. The Servo
preparation completion signal SA becomes 0, however . (This signal can
be held at 1 using the SAK parameter(bit 0 of parameter No. 004)
Y66.0 Command data 1

COM. The host sets command data 1 to specify the feed rate for peripheral
Data 1 Y66.3 equipment control.
FUNC. Y66.4 Function code

Code Y66.7 The host sets the peripheral equipment control function code.
Y67 Command data 2

COM. The host sets command data 2 to specify the amount of movement for
Data 2 Y70 peripheral equipment control.
Overr ide signals

The host applies override to jog feed and cutting feedrates.
*OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1 ‘Override *OV3 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1 ‘Override
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 80
Y71 .0 1 1 1 0 10 0 1 1 0 90
*OV1 1 1 0 1 20 0 1 0 1 100
Y71 .1
1 1 0 0 30 0 1 0 0 110
Y71 .2 1 0 1 1
*OV8 40 0 0 1 1 120
Y71 .3 1 0 1 0 50 0 0 1 0 130
1 0 0 1 60 0 0 0 1 140
1 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 0 150
Actual jog feed and automatic cutting feedrates are obtained by
multiplying the respective specified values by the override values.
- 22 -
SYHB. ABD. : '
Inscription . •
Rapid traverse override signals
The host specifies override for rapid traverse
The following table lists the override amount.
: mm: . RQV1 : Qyerr.idg amount
ROV1 Y71 .4 0 0 100%
ROV2 Y71 .5 0 0 50%
1 1 25%
1 1 FO
NOTE
FO is a value specified in parameter No. 061.
Dry run signal

Dry run is valid
during automatic operat ion(AUT0 mode). During dry run,
a feedrate command issued during automatic operation is ignored, and a
manual-feed feedrate determined by override signals *0V1~*0V8 is used.
Dry run is also valid for rapid traverse. When the RT signal is set to
1 during dry run, the "rapid traverse rate" and the "maximum
DRN Y71 .6
manual-feed feedrate"are used for the rapid traverse and- cutting feed
blocks, respectively. When the RT signal is reset to 0, the "sage rate
as the manual-feed feedrate" is resumed.
- Setting the DRN signal to 1 causes the system to enter the dry run
state. Resetting it to 0 resumes the feed rate specified during
automat ic operation.
Manual rapid traverse selection signal

The host selects rapid traverse for jog feed.
The RT signal is valid when jog feed mode(JOG) is selected. When the
signal is 1, jog feed is performed at a rapid traverse rate. Under this
RT Y71 .7
condition, setting a feed axis and direction selection signal (+X or -X)
is 1, and an override signal is valid, setting the RT signal to 1
starts rapid traverse. Resetting the RT signal to 0 resumes normal
feed.
- 23 -
(9) Alarm display and corresponding coutermeasures
. '
'• • .. ,
1
•
Number Alarm type'

000 ~ 299 Program / Setting Alarm
300 ~ 399, 401 Pulse Coder Alarm
400 ~ 499 Servo Alarm
500 ~ 599 Over Travel Alarm
System / I/O Link Alarm
< Program / Setting Alarm (PS Alarm) >

/ No LEO Description Countermeasure
000
B A parameter that requires power-down
has been specified.
Turn the power off, then back on.
011
B The specified feedrate is zero.
Check the feedrate parameter
specified with a function code.
B
Check the value of parameter No.
The specified feedrate(maximum
013 feedrate) is zero.
043, which indicates the maximum
feedrate that can be specified.
070
B More than 32b locks have been re¬
gistered for a buffering operation.
Reduce the number of registered
blocks to 32.
B
Input from the reader/punch inter¬ Correct the baud rate of the input
085 face or the like caused an overrun, /output unit (a I ways 4800) or other
par i ty, or framing error . settings.
Input from the reader/punch inter¬
086
B face or the like includes an input
/output unit operation ready signal
(DR)that is set to off.
After input from the reader/punch
Turn the reader/punch on.
Check the cable connection.
B
interface or the like stops , char¬
087 acter input does not stop even Check the cable connection.
though ten characters have been
input .
- 24 -
No. _ LED “7 l>t®:rip!ion q .ÿbfr':*'.
'
•
V’fc-sO
Foster measure
v .
Kj'/fergUr /: -,S-- A
Move the tool in the direction

of reference position return in
090
B Reference position setting cannot
be executed normal ly.
jog mode at a speed that causes
the servo position error to
exceed 128. Then, specify ano¬
ther reference position setting
i 1 A first to third reference position
I
return cannot be executed because
093 the reference position has not yet
Set the reference position.
been established.
i 1 The reference position has not yet
been established. This occurs only
224 when the ZRTN bit of parameter
Set the reference position.
No. 001 is set to 0.
250 Cl Input data 1 is invalid.

Check input data 1, specified
with a funct ion code.
251 n Input data 2 is inval id.

Check input data 2, specified
wi th a function code.
i
Operation cannot be activated

because an i nva I i d mode i s spec i f i ed Check the mode. Check whether
255 or because block execution is in a block is being executed.
progress.
290
--- 1
H
The interface switch signal (DRC) Switch the signal after block
was switched during block execution. execution stops.
The speed of an axial movement
291 r specified by an external pulse has

exceeded the upper limit.
Check the speed specified by the
external pulse. Check the magni¬
i
i 1 This occurs only when the EPEXA bit
of parameter No. 001 is set to 1.
fication of the external pulse
(parameter No. 062 and 063)
Parameter are cleared. Set the
292
H A checksum error for the battery-
powered memory was detected.
parameters again. If this alarm
subsequently recurs, replace the
unit.
- 25 -
< Pulse Coder Alarm >
No. LED mimm
Check the continuity of the signal
cable. If the cable is normal, the
B
pulse coder may be defective. Turn
A communication error(DTER) for the
300 serial pulse coder was detected.
the power off. If the alarm recurs
when the power is reapplied,
replace the serial pulse coder,
together with the motor.
301
B A communication error (CRCER) for the Check the continuity of the signal
serial pulse coder was detected. cable. If the cable is normal, the
pulse coder or servo unit may be
302
B A communication error (STBER) for the defective. This error can also be
serial pulse coder was detected. caused by external noise.
303
B An LED disconnect ion(LDAL) was
detected in the serial pulse coder. Turn the power off. If this alarm
recurs when the power is re¬
304
B A mispulse alarm(PMAL) for the
serial pulse coder was detected.
applied, replace the motor.
Turn the power off. If this alarm

recurs when the power is re¬
305
B A miscount alarm(CMAl) for the
serial pulse coder was detected.
applied, replace the motor.
If the alarm does not recur, re¬
start the operation from reference
position return.
This alarm is issued when the
amplifier has overheated, causing
the thermostat to trip.
Possible causes include an ex¬
cessively high ambient temperature
306
B The motor has overheated (0HAL).
and excessively strict operation
condi t ions.
Check the actual cause.
Disconnect the power ofr about ten
minutes, then release the emer¬
gency stop state. If the alarm
recurs, replace the amplifier.
- 26 -
No. v! LED -
GounteririeasUre
-••
308
B A soft phase a I arm(SPHAL) was de¬
tected.
When the absolute pulse coder is

Turn the power off. This alarm may
be caused by noise.
Cause the motor to rotate through

I I
u more than one turn in jog feed
used, the motor has not yet rotated
319 through more than one turn ager the mode, then turn the power off then
first power-up. back on.
S
Replace the battery.
The battery voltage of the absolute
350 pulse coder is low.
Restart the operation from re¬
ference position return.
351
L
_JI The battery voltage of the absolute
pulse coder is low. (warning)
Replace the battery.
i 1
Servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY)

401
01 went off.
< Servo Alarm >

No. LED Description Countermeasure
Turn the power off. After a while,
400
0
i
The servo motor has overheated
(estimated value)
turn the power back on. Possible
causes indued an excessively high
ACC/OEC frequency.
a
The load on the motor may be too
The cooling fins have overheated.
403 (hardware detection)
high.
Re-examine the load conditions.
- 27 -
No. LES> . I 'ÿ
Descr i pti oh V 'I
This alarm is issued when the
average regenerative discharge
The regenerative discharge unit has
energy is too high (when the
overheated.
ACC/DEC frequency is too high, for
example) .
When the regenerative discharge resistor is not being used, check whe¬
ther a dummy connector is fitted to the CX11-6 connector.
1) The average regenerative discharge energy may be too high. Decrease
404
LI the ACC/DEC frequency.
2) The thermostat line of the separate regenerative discharge unit may
not be connected properly. Check the connection.
3) The thermostat of the separate regenerative discharge unit may be
defective. Disconnect the separate regenerative discharge unit, then
check the thermostat. If the thermostat is open even through the
separate regenerative discharge unit is cool, replace the separate
regenerative discharge unit.
If (1) to (3) are not the cause of the alarm, replace the servo
ammpli tier.
405
a Reference position return could not
be executed correctly.
The servo position error in the stop

Re-execute reference position
return.
Determine the mechanical cause of

the large posi t ion error . If no
410
Q state is larger than the value spe¬
cified in parameter No. 110.
mechanical cause is found, specify
a larger value for the parameter
Determine the mechanical cause of
the large position error. If no
mechanical cause is found, apply
The servo position error during any of the following counter¬
411
a movement is larger than the value
specified in parameter No. 182
measures •'
•Specify a
parameter
•Specify
larger value for the
a lower feedrate.
• Increase the time contants.
- 28 -
My "m. •
" : Oescr ipt'isn

This alarm is issued when an ex¬
An overcurrent alarm is issued. cessively large current flows in
the main circuit.
1) Check whether a valid motor number is specified in parameter No. 30.
2) Check whether the standard values are specified in the current con¬
trol parameters for servo control.
Correct current control is possible only when the standard values are
specified for the following parameter
=* No. 70, 71, 72, 78, 79, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90
3) Disconnect the power line from the amplifier connector. Then, release
the emergency stop state.
=> If the overcurrent alarm continues to be issued, replace the AMP.
=> If no overcurrent alarm is issued, go to (4)
412 4) Disconnect the power line from the AMP connector. Check the insul¬
ation between the ground and each of U, V, and W. If the insulation
is satisfactory, go to (5)
If a short-circuit is detected, disconnect the power line from the
motor connector. Then, check the insulation between the ground and
each of U, V, and W of the motor.
If a short-circuit is found between the ground and U, V, or W of the
motor, replace the motor.
If the insulation is satisfactory, replace the power line.
5) Connect the power line. Observe the waveform of the motor current(IR,
IS) while the motor is accelerating or decelerating. If the motor
current(IR, IS) does not exhibit a normal sine wave, replace the
amplifier.
6) I f ( 1 ) to (4) above are not the cause of the alarm, the pulse coder,
command cable, or internal hardware of the CNC may be defective.

A DC link overvoltage alarm is
voltage of the main circuit power
issued.
is too high.
1) The supply voltage ofr dynamic power may exceed the rated value.
Check the voltage. If the voltage is too high, reduce the voltage to
an appropriate level.
413
B 2) The regenerative discharge unit may not be properly connected.
Check the connection.
3) The resistance of the separate regenerative discharge unit may be
abnormal. Disconnect the separate regenerative discharge unit, then
check the resistance. If the resistance is not within + 20% of the
predetermined resistance, replace the separate regenerative discharge
unit. I f ( 1 ) to (3) are not the cause of the alarm, replace the servo
AMP.
- 29 -
No. LED Desc'r ipt i on \| " i=

ADC link low vol tage alarm is
voltage of the main circuit power
issued.
is too low.
1) The external circuit breaker may be turned off.
414
0 Check the circuit breaker.
2) The supply voltage for dynamic power is lower than the rated value.
Check the voltage. If the voltage is too low, increase it to an
appropriate level.
3) The external magnetic contactor amy not be connected properly.
Check the connect ion.
I f ( 1 ) to (3) are not the cause of the alarm, replace the servo AMP.
Check the following parameter :

No.30:ls the specified motor type
correct?
No .31: Is the specified direction
0
of rotation of the motor correct?
A parameter has been specified in¬
417 correctly.
No. 106: Is the denominator of the
number of pulses per single re¬
volution of the motor "0"?
No. 180: Is the specified reference
counter capacity 0 or a negative
va I ue?
418 A DO alarm is issued. Replace the servo unit.
423
0 The specified speed exceeds 32767000 Re-examine the CMR and speed
detection units per second. settings.
This alarm is issued when the fan
n
The cooling fan has stopped. motor built into the servo AMP has
fai led.
425
[_] 1) Check that the fan is not clogged with foreign matter.
2) Check that the power connector of the fan is connected properly.
3) Replace the fan or servo unit.
- 30 -
< Over Travel Alarm >
No. LED r.V
500
B The positive stroke limit has been
exceeded.
Check whether *+0T and *-0T are
connected correctly. Check whether
a correct move command is speci¬
B
fied. Move the tool in the oppo¬
The negative stroke limit has been site direction in jog mode, then
501 exceeded. perform a reset.
B
Check whether appropriate values
The positive soft stroke limit has
510 have been specified for parameters
been exceeded.
No. 142 and 143. Check whether a
valid move command is specified.
511
B The negative soft stroke limit has
been exceeded.
Move the tool in the opposite
direction in jog mode, then per¬
form a reset.
< System Alarm >

No. LED Descript ion Countermeasure
B An error was detected in the RAM

write/read test at power-up.
Replace the unit.
Turn the power off then back on.
B
An error was detected in the data
Then, re-enter the parameters. If
collation check for the battery-
this alarm recurs, replace the
powered memory.
unit.
A data transfer alarm for the bat¬

Replace the unit.
I tery-powered memory has been issued.
I
I Turn the power off then back on.
A watch dog alarm was issued. If this alarm recurs, replace the
unit.
— i
A checksum alarm for the control

I
software ROM is issued.
P A checksum alarm for the ROM that is Replace the unit .

built into the CPU is issued.
An error was detected in the control

j j
circui t .
~4
- 31 -
< I/O Link Alarm >
Hill: Description |- tount«W I
---
NO. .
! Turn off the power to all units
I A FANUC I/O link error occurred.
I connected to the line. Then, turn
-—-II A unit connected to the line was
on the slave devices, followed by
I turned off.
the master dievice.
< No LED display > • ... ", • .ÿ
feenWron;
•
No. LED :
M Gount.o|f}ieasure, ,
.
1) Check the 24-VDC control supply

voltage. If the voltage is low,
increase the voltage to an
appropriate level.
No indi¬ The control circuit is not operating
2) Check whether a fuse in the
cators I i t normal ly. servo unit has blown.
If (1)~(2) are not the cause,

replace the servo AMP.
- 32 -
(10) POWER MATE CNC MANAGER Function
1. SOFT KEY Status Transition Diagram
® After CNC function select key SYSTEM | js selected, the following screen can
be selected by pressing the next-menu key I t> I several times until [PMM] is
displayed.
(Function menu)
=> [ ] [ ] [Km] [ALL 10] [(OPRT)]
(g) Pressing the soft key [ PMM ] , system configuration screen appears, and the
following soft key menu is displayed.
(Sub menu)
=» [ POS ] [ ] [ ] [MHI] [ MSG ]
2-1. When [ POS ] is selected, and the following soft key menu is displayed.
(Sub menu)
=> i wmm i ] [MACHIN] [ ] [ ]
2-2. When [SYSTEM] is selected, and the following soft key menu is displayed.
(Sub menu)
=> [PARAM] [DGNOS] [ ] [SYSTEM] [ ]
The following screen can be selected by pressing the next-menu key I I

several times.
(Sub menu)
[ 4 NEXT] [ t BACK] [ ZOOM ] [ ] [ ]
=> Pressing the previous-menu key I I resumes the function selection soft
key menu.
- 33 -
3. System Configuration
0 Pressing the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key displays the following soft
key menu
POWER MATE CNC MANAGER

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1. GROUP IP „.V: .,;V
SYSTEM (SERIES/VERSION) 88A1 09

=> Servo unit 3 series
system software series
SELECT ACTIVE SLAVE [ >1 and edition]
[PARAM] [DGNOS] [ ] MSI] l ]
(2) Pressing the [ WORK ] soft key displays the absolute coordinate screen.

POSITION (WORK)
1. GROUP / P
1 6000
F 0
SELECT ACTIVE SLAVE [ t> ]

[ WORK 1 [ ] [MACHIN] [ ] [ ]
385 1 : Coordinate F : Actual speed
©Pressing the [PARAM] soft key displays the parameter screen.

PARAMETER
1. GROUP i (3
0000 00001000 0010 11110000
0001 00010010 0011 00010000
:
0009 00000000 0019 00000000
SELECT ACTIVE SLAVE [ > .]
[gAM] [DGNOS] [ ] [SYSTEM] [(OPRT)]
- 34 -
@ Pressing the [ MSG ] function selection soft key display only an error code
on the screen.
ALARM
1. GROUP /, P
442 210 232
SELECT ACTIVE SLAVE I > ]

i POS j [ ii ] [SYSTEM] mm]
4. Parameters
•The parameters required for each function of the /?AMP with an 1/0 link must be
set up in advance.
1) Display operations
Pressing the I SYSTEM function selection soft key displays the following soft
key menu :
(Sub menu)
[PARAM]'- [DGNOS] [ ] [SYSTEM] [ (OPRT) ]
Pressing the [PARAM] soft key displays the parameter screen.

2) Displays

PARAMETER
1. GROUP’ / 0
0000 00001000 0010 11110000
0001 00010010 0011 00010000
: :
0009 00000000 0019 00000000
SELECT ACTIVE SLAVE [ > ]
DM] [DGNOS] [ ] [SYSTEM] [(OPRT)]
This screen display bit-bype and decimal data only.

3) Saving parameter
Parameters can be saved as program data files to the CNC memory or to a memory
card.
- 35 -
To save parameters, first set the first registration program number in parameter
P8760. Programa are created using a number assigned to each /?AMP with an I/O link.
This number is treated as a program number when the parameters are saved to the CNC
memory. When they are saved to a memory card, however, a file is created using the
program number and PMM as its file name and file extension, respectively.
ex) If 6500 is set in parameter P8760

A program number for a program in group n is: 6500 n*10 +
The group number is a number in "group n" displayed in the title of a /?AMP with
an I/O link. If an existing program in the memory has the same program number,
the existing program is overwritten with the new data.
Parameter P960 is used to select a device to save parameters.
Before proceeding to the following steps, connect a memory card or ensure that
the CNC memory is available.
® Select an active slave.
© Press the [ (OPRT) ] soft key to display :
(Sub menu)
[NO.SRC] [ 1 I ] [ ] [ INPUT ]
Press the next-menu I 1 key.

(Sub menu)
[ ] [ READ ] [ PUNCH ] [ ] [ ]
<3) Press the [ READ ] soft key to display :

(Sub menu)
[ 1 [ 1 [ ] [CANCEL] [ EXEC ]
Press the [ EXEC ] soft key.

While the parameters are being saved, the message rINPUTj blinks on the
message line.
4) Writing parameter
•Parameter data files saved as programs to the CNC memory or memory card can be
restored and written to the /?AMP with an I/O link determined from a program
number. The program number and device are determined using the same method as in
item (3).
® Select an active slave.
© Press the [ (OPRT) ] soft key to display :
(Sub menu)
[NO.SRC] [ ! [ ] [ ] [ INPUT ]
- 36 -
Press the next-menu key.
(Sub menu)
[ ] [ READ ] [ PUNCH ] [ ] [ ]
(3) Press the [ PUNCH ] soft key to display :

(Sub menu)
I ] [ ] [ ] [CANCEL] [ EXEC ]
Press the [ EXEC ] soft key.

While the parameters are being written, the message r0UTPUTj blinks on
the message line.
5) Searching for parameter

A parameter can be searched for and displayed by means of the following procedure.
© Select an active slave.
(D Press the [ (OPRT) ] soft key to display :
(Sub menu)
[NO.SRC] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ INPUT ]
(3) Key in a desired number on the key-in line using the MDI keypad, then press
the [ NO.SRC ] soft key to start the search.
6) Setting parameter
Parameters for /?AMP with an I/O link can be set directly from the CNC by means
of the following procedure.
© Select an active slave.
(2) Press the [ (OPRT) ] soft key to display :
(Sub menu)
[NO.SRC] [ ] [ 1 [ ] [ INPUT ]
(3) Position the cursor to the desired parameter.

© Key in the desired data Key-in line using the MDI keypad, then press the
[ INPUT ] soft key or the INPUT key on the MDI keypad.
- 37 -

HyundaiWia - SKT21LMS INSTALL MAINT MANUAL

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HyundaiWia - SKT21LMS INSTALL MAINT MANUAL

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SKT15LMS/21LMS CNC fflGH SPEED LATHE

VERSION No. : VOL 1.0

Always observe this manual to ensure proper operation and to

PRINTED IN HYUNDAI-KIA MACHINE

W. TRANSPORT & INSTALLATION

V. REPAIR & PRESERVATION

1-1 . Symbol and Description I -6

Billi wsmmm u HII S mm mmmmwm

(1) NC device Operation Manual

(2) Installation & Maintenance Manual

(3) Parameter List

(4) Parameter List

(5) Alarm List

(6) Part List

(7) Electric Circuit Diagram

1-1 Symbol and Description

(1) This manual contains 7 chapters shown in the Roman numerals.

(2) Each chapter contains several sections.

(3) A section contains several items

(4) Each item contains several paragraph

Ex) Table 3-1 Specification

post, and has the following features.

(1) Enables chuck works.

3. Notice When Operating the Machine I -10

4. Notice When Repairing and Checking I -14

5. Notice on the Electric And NC Devices 1-17 I

6. Safety Device 1-19

6-1 . Name Plates I -19

6-2. Safety Device I -20 i

6-2-2. Pressure Switch(Applicable only to the C.E.) ... 1-21

A DANGER Failure to comply may result in personal death.

Failure to comply may result in personal severe injury or

Failure to comply may result in personal light injury or

(12) Do not reconstruct the machine without our prior permission.

(5) Always wear protective glasses during working.

(6) Always wear safety shoes.

(8) Never operate the machine while wearing gloves.

(10) Do not operate the machine while drinking or taking a medicine.

(11) Do not operate the machine when feeling a sick or sleepy.

3. Notice When Operating the Machine.

(3) Do not adjust the location of coolant nozzle while operating.

(6) Check the belt for tension. Make it sure

(3) Check each bolt is clamped properly.

(8) After installing the tool, first perform a test operation.

(11) Check the pressure gage indicates correctly.

4. Notice When Repairing And Checking

Keep hands or head

6-2. Safety Device

No. Name Function

1 Door Lock System If the door opened while operating the

2 Emergency Stop Switch If pressing this switch, all operating

6-2-1. Door Lock System (Applicable only to the C.E.)

6-2-2. Pressure Switch (Applicable only to the C.E.)

- Keep the pressure of pressure switch with 80% of chuck.

1-8. Sub Spindle & B-axis 1-6

3. NC Device Specification 1-9

4. Machine Part and Name 1-20

5. Machine Outline Diagram 1-21

7. Chuck and Rotary Cylinder 1-26

8. Tool Post 1-32

1-1. Head Stock

1-2. Tool Post